2020 GMC Yukon Owners Manual · 2020-04-09 · GMC Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner Manual...

84367243 B

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

20_GMC_Yukon_YukonXL_YukonDenali_COV_en_US_84367243B_2019AUG05.ai 1 8/2/2019 11:48:38 AM20_GMC_Yukon_YukonXL_YukonDenali_COV_en_US_84367243B_2019AUG05.ai 1 8/2/2019 11:48:38 AM

GMC Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-13566587) - 2020 - CRC - 4/15/19

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . 9

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . 114

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 174

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 183

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 377

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 396

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 406

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, YUKON, andDENALI are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Company” forGMC wherever it appears in thismanual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner’s manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 84367243 B Second Printing ©2019 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’smanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”


4 Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. See thefeatures in this manual forinformation.

u : Air Conditioning System

G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

9 : Dispose of Used ComponentsProperly

P : Do Not Apply High PressureWater

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

H : Flammable

[ : Forward Collision Alert

R : Fuse Block Cover LockLocation

+ : Fuses

j : ISOFIX/LATCH System ChildRestraints

Q : Keep Fuse Block CoversProperly Installed

| : Lane Change Alert

@ : Lane Departure Warning

A : Lane Keep Assist

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

X : Park Assist

~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

O : Power

7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert

I : Registered Technician

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Seat Belt Reminders

I : Side Blind Zone Alert

h : Stop/Start

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

a : Under Pressure

V : Vehicle Ahead Indicator


Introduction 5

Instrument Panel Overview


6 Introduction

1. Air Vents 0 180.

2. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 147(If Equipped).

3. g Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 226.

j Power Assist Steps 0 32 (IfEquipped).

X Park Assist Button (IfEquipped). See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing0 242.

A Lane Keep Assist (LKA)0 251 (If Equipped).

0 Pedal Adjust Switch (IfEquipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal0 201.

4. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 169.

Windshield Wiper/Washer0 116.

5. Favorite Switches (Out ofView). See “Steering WheelControls” in the infotainmentmanual.

Volume Switches (Out of View).See “Steering Wheel Controls”in the infotainment manual.

6. Hazard Warning Flashers0 168.

7. Instrument Cluster 0 126.

8. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 213.

Tow/Haul Selector Button. SeeTow/Haul Mode 0 218.

Range Selection Mode (IfEquipped). See Manual Mode0 216.

9. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 167.

10. Infotainment 0 174.

11. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 175.

12. Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 54 (If Equipped).

13. Rear Climate Control Buttons.See Rear Climate ControlSystem 0 179.

14. Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) 0 202 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 204.

15. Steering Wheel Controls. Seethe infotainment manual.

16. Horn 0 116.

17. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 115.

18. Hood Release. See Hood0 284.

19. Cruise Control 0 230.

Adaptive Cruise Control 0 232(If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 245 (If Equipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 116(If Equipped).

20. Trailer Brake Control Panel (IfEquipped). See TowingEquipment 0 270.


Introduction 7

21. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 136.

22. Automatic Transfer Case Knob(If Equipped). See Four-WheelDrive 0 219.

23. Parking Brake 0 225.

24. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 164.

Fog Lamps 0 169 (IfEquipped).

25. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 170.


8 Introduction

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 9

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . 9Keys (Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 23Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 25Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 33

Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . 35Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Immobilizer Operation (Key

Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Immobilizer Operation (Keyless

Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . 39Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 41Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 41Automatic Dimming Rearview

Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Keys and Locks

Keys (Keyless Access)

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, andchildren or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.


10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

If the vehicle has the KeylessAccess system, there is a key in thetransmitter.

The key, inside the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, can beused for all locks.

To remove the key, press the buttonon the side of the RKE transmitternear the bottom, and pull the keyout. Never pull the key out withoutpressing the button.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

With an active OnStar or connectedservice plan, an OnStar Advisormay remotely unlock the vehicle.See OnStar Overview 0 410.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 400.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 51.

Keys (Key Access)

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

children or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.

{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

moved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may beimpacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

The ignition key and key rings, andRKE transmitter, if equipped, aredesigned to work together as asystem to reduce the risk ofunintentionally moving the key outof the RUN position. The ignitionkey has a small hole to allow

attachment of the provided key ring.It is important that any replacementignition keys have a small hole. Seeyour dealer if a replacement key isrequired.

The combination and size of therings that came with your keys werespecifically selected for yourvehicle. The rings are connected tothe key like two links of a chain toreduce the risk of unintentionallymoving the key out of the RUNposition. Do not add any additionalitems to the ring attached to theignition key. Attach additional itemsonly to the second ring, and limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.



Interference from radio-frequencyidentification (RFID) tags mayprevent the key from starting thevehicle. Keep RFID tags away fromthe key when starting the vehicle.

The key can be used for the ignition,and all locks.

If equipped with memory seats,keys 1 and 2 are linked to seatingpositions of memory 1 or 2. SeeMemory Seats 0 51.

Programming Keys to theVehicle

Follow these procedures to programup to eight keys to the vehicle.

Programming with TwoRecognized Keys (KeyVehicles Only)

To program a new key:

1. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand turn the ignition on withoutstarting the engine.

2. Turn the ignition off andremove the key.

3. Quickly, within five seconds,insert the second originalalready programmed key in theignition and turn the ignition onwithout starting the engine.

4. Turn the ignition off andremove the key.

5. Insert the new key to beprogrammed, and withinfive seconds, turn the ignitionon without starting the engine.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If a key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer to have a new key made.

Programming without RecognizedKeys (Key Vehicles Only)

Program a new key to the vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that Canadian owners seetheir dealer.



If two currently recognized keys arenot available, follow this procedureto program the first key.

This procedure will takeapproximately 30 minutes tocomplete for the first key. Thevehicle must be off and all of thekeys must be with you.

1. Insert the new vehicle key intothe ignition.

2. Turn the ignition on withoutstarting the engine. Thesecurity light will come on.

3. Wait 10 minutes until thesecurity light turns off.

4. Turn the ignition off.

5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two moretimes. After the third time, turnthe ignition on; the key islearned and all previouslyknown keys will no longer workwith the vehicle.

6. To learn the second key, turnthe ignition off, insert thesecond key to be learned, andturn the ignition on withoutstarting the engine.

After the two keys are learned,remaining keys can be learned byfollowing the procedure in“Programming with Two RecognizedKeys (Key Vehicles Only).”

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 400.

With an active OnStar or connectedservice plan, an OnStar Advisormay remotely unlock the vehicle.See OnStar Overview 0 410.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 405.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operatingrange:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation(Key Access)The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 13.



/ : Press and release Q, then

immediately press and hold / until

the turn signal lamps flash or for atleast four seconds. The engine maybe started from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 23.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash once to indicate locking hasoccurred. If enabled, the horn chirps

when Q is pressed again within

three seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.

See Vehicle Alarm System 0 33.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q for

one second will fold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

K : Press once to unlock the driverdoor. If K is pressed again within

three seconds, all remaining doorsunlock. The interior lamps maycome on and stay on for 20 secondsor until the ignition is turned on.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. If enabled, the exteriorlamps may turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

disarms the alarm system. SeeVehicle Alarm System 0 33.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K for

one second will unfold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Press and hold K until the windows

fully open, if remote windowoperation is enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

b : Press twice to open or closethe liftgate. Press once to stop theliftgate from moving.

c : Press twice to open theliftglass.

7 : Press and release to initiate thevehicle locator. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and hold 7 for more than

three seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns off



when the ignition is turned on or 7is pressed again. The ignition mustbe off for the panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.Each vehicle can have up toeight transmitters programmed to it.See your dealer for transmitterprogramming.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the DriverInformation Center displaysREPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate and remove the backcover of the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a coin.

2. Press and slide the batterydown toward the pocket of thetransmitter in the direction ofthe key ring. Do not use ametal object

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Push together the transmitterback cover top side first, andthen the bottom toward thekey ring.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation(Keyless Access)The Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft). See “KeylessAccess Operation” later in thissection.

The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 13.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash once on the second press toindicate locking has occurred.If enabled, the horn chirps when Qis pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

If the driver door is open when Q is

pressed and Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout is enabled, all doorswill lock and then the driver door will

immediately unlock. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152. If the

passenger door is open when Q is

pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.

See Vehicle Alarm System 0 33.

K : Press once to unlock only thedriver door. If K is pressed again

within three seconds, all remainingdoors unlock. The interior lampsmay come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. If enabled, the exteriorlamps may turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

disarms the alarm system. SeeVehicle Alarm System 0 33.



Press and hold K until the windows

fully open, if remote windowoperation is enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

b : Press twice to open or closethe liftgate. Press once to stop theliftgate from moving.

c : Press twice to open theliftglass.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locate. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and hold 7 for more than

three seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns off

when the ignition is turned on or 7is pressed again. The ignition mustbe off for the panic alarm to work.

/ : Press and release Q, then

immediately press and hold / until

the turn signal lamps flash or for at

least four seconds. The engine maybe started from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 23.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system allowsfor doors and the liftgate to beaccessed without pressing the RKEtransmitter button. The RKEtransmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)of the liftgate or door being opened.If the vehicle has this feature, therewill be a button on the outside doorhandles.

Keyless Access can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first lock/unlock press from thedriver door. Keyless access canalso be turned off. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 51.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors and the liftgate willunlock.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar



Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more thanfive seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on a passengerdoor handle will unlock all doors.Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Disable/Enable Keyless Unlockingof Exterior Door Handles andLiftgate

If equipped, keyless unlocking of theexterior door handles and liftgatecan be disabled and enabled.

Disabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press and holdQ and K on the RKE transmitter atthe same time for approximatelythree seconds. The turn signallamps will flash four times quickly toindicate access is disabled. Usingany exterior handle to unlock thedoors or open the liftgate will causethe turn signal lamps to flash fourtimes quickly, indicating access isdisabled. If disabled, disarm thealarm system before starting thevehicle.

Enabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press and holdQ and K on the RKE transmitter atthe same time for approximatelythree seconds. The turn signallamps will flash twice quickly toindicate access is enabled. Enablingand disabling may also be

configured from the personalizationmenu. See “Passive Door Unlock”under Vehicle Personalization0 152.

Passive Locking

If equipped with Keyless Access,this feature will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and atleast one RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior, or noneremain in the interior.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, thedoors may lock with the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle. Donot leave the RKE transmitter in anunattended vehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalization0 152.



Temporary Disable of PassiveLocking

Temporarily disable passive lockingby pressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or untilthree chimes are heard. Passivelocking will then remain disableduntil Q on the interior door ispressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

Remote Left In Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off andan RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle, the horn will chirp threetimes after all doors are closed. Toturn on or off see VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert

If the vehicle is on with a door open,and then all doors are closed, thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is not detected, theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay NO REMOTE DETECTEDand the horn will chirp three times.

This occurs only once each time thevehicle is driven. To turn on or offsee Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

Keyless Liftgate Opening

Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handle toopen the liftgate when all doors areunlocked, or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

Keyless Liftglass Opening

Press the exterior liftglass button toopen the liftglass when all doors areunlocked, or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

See Liftgate 0 27.

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a weaktransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 24.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased and

programmed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters matchedto it.

Programming with RecognizedTransmitters

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere are two recognizedtransmitters.

To program, the vehicle must be offand all transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.

1. Remove the key from therecognized transmitter.

2. Place the two recognizedtransmitters in the cupholder oron the passenger seat.

3. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder on the driverdoor handle. Then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.



The DIC displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4, ETC.

4. Place the new transmitter inthe transmitter pocket/insert.

Open the center consolestorage area and the storagetray. The transmitter pocket/insert is in front of the storagearea next to the center consolestorage area between thedriver and front passengerseats.

5. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter islearned, the DIC display willshow that it is ready to programthe next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K or Q on thetransmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold ENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds toexit programming mode.

7. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Programming without RecognizedTransmitters

If two currently recognizedtransmitters are not available, followthis procedure to program up toeight transmitters. This feature isnot available in Canada. Thisprocedure will take approximately

30 minutes to complete. The vehiclemust be off and all transmitters tobe programmed must be with you.

1. Remove the vehicle key fromthe transmitter.

2. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder on the driverdoor handle; then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The DIC displays REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN,then press ENGINESTART/STOP.

The DIC will again displayREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

4. Repeat Step 3 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with the



vehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.

The DIC should now displayREADY FOR REMOTE # 1.

5. Place the new transmitter inthe transmitter pocket/insert.

Open the center consolestorage area and the storagetray. The transmitter pocket/insert is in front of the storagearea next to the center consolestorage area between thedriver and front passengerseats.

6. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter islearned, the DIC display willshow that it is ready to programthe next transmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket/insertand press K or Q on thetransmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 5–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold ENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds toexit programming mode.

8. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEYWAS DETECTED PLACE KEY IN

TRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE whenstarting the vehicle.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center consolestorage area and thestorage tray.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brakepedal and ENGINESTART/STOP.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.



Battery Replacement

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the DIC displaysREPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Press the button on the side ofthe RKE transmitter and pullthe key out. Never pull the keyout without pressing the button.

2. With the key removed, insert aflat, thin object in the center ofthe transmitter to separate andremove the back cover.

3. Lift the battery with a flatobject.

4. Remove the battery.

5. Insert the new battery, positiveside toward the back cover.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

6. Push together the transmitter.

7. Reinsert the key.



Remote Vehicle StartThe climate control system willcome on when the vehicle is startedremotely depending on the outsidetemperature.

The rear defog and heated andventilated seats may also come on.See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 54 andVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use remote start if thevehicle is low on fuel. The vehiclecould run out of fuel.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if:

. The vehicle is not off.

. The key is in the ignition (KeyAccess) or the RKE transmitteris in the vehicle (KeylessAccess).

. The hood is not closed.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction and themalfunction indicator lamp is on.

The engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if:

. The coolant temperature getstoo high.

. The oil pressure gets low.

The RKE transmitter range may bereduced while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 13 orVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flashor for at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to runfor 15 minutes. RepeatSteps 1 and 2 for a 15-minutetime extension.

Turn the ignition on to operate thevehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can beextended by 15 minutes, for a totalof 30 minutes, if during the first15 minutes Steps 1 and 2 arerepeated while the engine is stillrunning. An extension can berequested, 30 seconds afterstarting.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off to useremote start again.



Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold / until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and then off.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. The doorscan be unlocked andopened while the vehicle ismoving. The chance ofbeing thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, all

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers should wearseat belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

. Use the key in the driver door.

To lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the power doorlock switch.

. Pushing down the manual lockknob on the driver door will lockall doors. Pushing down themanual lock knob on apassenger door will lock onlythat door.

. Pulling an interior door handlewill unlock the door. Pulling thedoor handle again unlatches it.

Keyless Access

If equipped, the RKE transmittermust be within 1 m (3 ft) of theliftgate or door being opened. Pressthe button on the door handle toopen. See “Keyless AccessOperation” in Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.



Free-Turning Locks

The door key lock cylinder turnsfreely when either the wrong key isused, or the correct key is not fullyinserted. The free-turning door lockfeature prevents the lock from beingforced open. To reset the lock, turnit to the vertical position with thecorrect key fully inserted. Removethe key and insert it again. If thisdoes not reset the lock, turn the keyhalfway around in the cylinder andrepeat the reset procedure.

Power Door Locks

Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking ofthe doors until five seconds after alldoors are closed.

Delayed locking can only be turnedon when the Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout feature has beenturned off.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch while the door isopen, a chime will sound threetimes indicating delayed locking isactive.

The doors will lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors areclosed. If a door is reopened beforethat time, the five-second timer willreset when all doors are closedagain.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again or press Q on the RKEtransmitter to lock the doorsimmediately.

This feature can be programmed.See “Delayed Door Lock” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, theignition is on, and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park).

If a vehicle door is unlocked, andthen opened and closed, the doorswill lock either when your foot is



removed from the brake or thevehicle speed becomes faster than13 km/h (8 mph).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on the power door lockswitch.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Automatic door locking cannot bedisabled. Automatic door unlockingcan be programmed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Lockout ProtectionKey Access : When locking isrequested with the driver door openand the key in the ignition, all thedoors will lock and then the driverdoor will unlock.

This can be manually overridden bypressing and holding Q on the

power door lock switch.

Keyless Access : When locking isrequested with the driver door openand the vehicle is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, all the doors will lockand then the driver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open,when all doors are closed thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is detected and thenumber of RKE transmitters insidehas not reduced, the driver door willunlock and the horn will sound threetimes.

This can be manually overridden bypressing and holding Q on the

power door lock switch.

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout isturned on and the vehicle is off, thedriver door is open, and locking isrequested, all the doors will lock andthe driver door will remain open.The Unlocked Door Anti-Lockoutfeature can be turned on or off. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety lockson the rear doors. The indicator lightcomes on when activated.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.



Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equippedwith a power liftgate, disablethe power liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust 0 212.

Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

Manual Liftgate

To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press Kon the RKE transmitter twice tounlock all doors. Press the touchpad (1) on the underside of theliftgate handle and lift up.

Press the button (2) above thelicense plate to open the liftglass,or pressc twice quickly on theRKE transmitter. Do not leave theliftglass open when raising theliftgate.



There will be a delay in the releaseof the liftglass if there is an attemptto open it while the rear wiper is inmotion.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

The liftgate can be opened whenlocked if the RKE transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

Power Liftgate Operation

{ Warning

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Caution

Driving with an open andunsecured liftgate may result indamage to the power liftgatecomponents.

If equipped, the power liftgateswitch is on the overhead console.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

The modes are:

MAX : Opens to maximum height.

3/4 : Opens to a reduced height thatcan be set from 3/4 to fully open.Use to prevent the liftgate fromopening into overhead obstructionssuch as a garage door orroof-mounted cargo. The liftgate canbe opened manually all the way.

OFF : Opens manually only.

To power open or close the liftgate,select MAX or 3/4 mode and then:



. Pressb twice quickly on theRKE transmitter until the liftgatemoves.

. Press8 on the overheadconsole. The driver door mustbe unlocked or locked withoutthe security armed.

. Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handleafter unlocking all doors.If equipped with Keyless Access,a locked vehicle can be openedif the RKE transmitter is within1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad.

. Pressl on the bottom edge ofthe liftgate next to the latch toclose.

Press any liftgate button, the touchpad, orb on the RKE transmitterwhile the liftgate is moving to stop it.Pressing any liftgate button orpressingb twice quickly on theRKE transmitter restarts theoperation in the reverse direction.Pressing the touch pad on theliftgate handle will restart themotion, but only in the openingdirection.

Caution

Manually forcing the liftgate toopen or close during a powercycle can damage the vehicle.Allow the power cycle tocomplete.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled in extremelylow temperatures, or after repeatedpower cycling over a short period of

time. If this occurs, the liftgate canstill be operated manually. SelectOFF on the liftgate switch.

If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate will continueto completion. If the vehicle isaccelerated before the liftgate hascompleted moving, the liftgate maystop or reverse direction. Check forDriver Information Center (DIC)messages and make sure theliftgate is closed and latched beforedriving.

Falling Liftgate Detection

If the power liftgate automaticallycloses after a power opening cycle,it indicates that the system isreacting to excess weight on theliftgate or a possible support strutfailure. Remove any excess weight.A repetitive chime will sound whilethe falling liftgate detection featureis operating. If the liftgate continuesto automatically close after opening,see your dealer for service beforeusing the power liftgate.



Interfering with the power liftgatemotion or manually closing theliftgate too quickly after poweropening may resemble a supportstrut failure. This could also activatethe falling liftgate detection feature.Allow the liftgate to complete itsoperation and wait a few secondsbefore manually closing the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,the liftgate will automatically reversedirection and move a short distanceaway from the obstacle. Afterremoving the obstruction, the powerliftgate operation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstructions,manually close the liftgate. This willallow normal power operationfunctions to resume.

If the vehicle is locked while theliftgate is closing, and an obstacle isencountered that prevents the

liftgate from completely closing, thehorn will sound as an alert that theliftgate did not close.

Pinch sensors are on the sideedges of the liftgate. If an object iscaught between the liftgate and thevehicle and presses against asensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and stop at a partially openposition. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again orclosed manually.

Setting the 3/4 Mode

To change the position the liftgatestops at when opening:

1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode andpower open the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate button. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifneeded.

3. Press and holdl on thebottom edge of the liftgate nextto the latch on the outside ofthe liftgate until the turn signals

flash and a beep sounds. Thisindicates the setting has beenrecorded.

The liftgate cannot be set below aminimum programmable height.If there is no light flash or sound,then the height adjustment may betoo low.

Manual Operation

Select OFF to manually operate theliftgate. See “Manual Liftgate” at thebeginning of this section.

Caution

Attempting to move the liftgatetoo quickly and with excessiveforce may result in damage to thevehicle.

Operate the liftgate manually with asmooth motion and moderatespeed. The system includes afeature which limits the manualclosing speed to protect thecomponents.



Hands-Free Operation

If equipped with Hands-Free VehicleAccess, the liftgate may beoperated with a kicking motionunder the rear bumper.

The liftgate will not operate if theRKE transmitter is not within1 m (3 ft).

The hands-free feature will not workwhile the liftgate is moving. To stopthe liftgate while in motion use oneof the liftgate switches.

The hands-free feature can becustomized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152. Choose fromthe following:

On-Open and Close : The kickingmotion is activated to both open andclose the liftgate.

On-Open Only : The kicking motionis activated to only open the liftgate.

Off : The feature is disabled.

Length of Kick Zone

To operate, move your foot in aforward kicking motion under thecenter of the rear bumper, then pullit back.

Caution

Splashing water may cause theliftgate to open. Keep the RKEtransmitter away from the rearbumper detection area or turn theliftgate mode to OFF whencleaning or working near the rearbumper to avoid accidentalopening.

. Do not sweep your foot sideto side.

. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; the liftgate will notactivate.

. Do not touch the liftgate until ithas stopped moving.

. This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions.If the liftgate does not respond tothe kick, open or close the



liftgate by another method orstart the vehicle. The feature willbe re-enabled.

When closing the liftgate using thisfeature, there will be a short delay.The rear lights will flash and achime will sound. Step away fromthe liftgate before it starts moving.

Power Assist Steps

{ Warning

To avoid personal injury orproperty damage, before enteringor exiting the vehicle, be sure thepower assist step is fullyextended. Do not step on thepower assist step while it ismoving. Never place hands orother body parts between theextended power assist step andthe vehicle.

If equipped, the power assist stepswill deploy when the door is openedand automatically retractthree seconds after the door isclosed. The power assist steps willretract immediately if the vehiclestarts moving.

Disable the power assist stepsbefore jacking or placing any objectunder the vehicle. Too much icebuildup may prevent deployment ofthe power assist steps. Check thestep position before exiting thevehicle. If this happens, disable thepower assist steps, clear the ice,then enable the assist steps andconfirm normal function prior to use.

Keep hands, children, pets, objects,and clothing clear of the powerassist steps when in motion. Thesteps will reverse direction if theyencounter an obstruction whenopening or closing. Remove theobstruction, then open and close thedoor on the same side to completethe motion of the assist steps. If theobstruction is not cleared, the assiststeps remain extended while driving.

To extend both power assist stepsfor cleaning, pressj while thevehicle is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).Pressj again to retract them.The DIC will display a message.



Enable/Disable

Press and holdj for four secondsto lock and disable the power assiststeps. Press and holdj forfour seconds again to enable them.The DIC will display a message.

Auto Power Assist Steps

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152. Select Off,On, or Extended.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, liftgate, or the hood is open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-seconddelay and immediately arm thealarm system.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlocked



by pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the liftgate, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have exited.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter, or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door withthe key will not disarm thesystem or turn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.

Power Sounder, InclinationSensor, and Intrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have a powersounder, inclination sensor, andintrusion sensor.

The power sounder provides anaudible alarm which is distinct fromthe vehicle’s horn. It has its own

power source, and can sound analarm if the vehicle’s battery iscompromised.

The inclination sensor can set offthe alarm if it senses movement ofthe vehicle, such as a change invehicle orientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle’s interior. Do notallow passengers or pets to remainin the vehicle when the intrusionsensor is activated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:

. Make sure all doors andwindows are completely closed.

. Secure any loose items such asa sunshades.

. Make sure there are noobstructions blocking thesensors in the front overheadconsole.

. Close DVD screens beforeleaving the vehicle.



Intrusion and InclinationSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors bedeactivated if pets are left in thevehicle or the vehicle is beingtransported.

With the vehicle off, presso inthe front overhead console to turnoff the feature.

The indicator light will come onmomentarily, indicating that thesesensors have been disabled untilthe next time the alarm system isarmed.

Steering Column LockIf equipped, the steering columnlock is a theft-deterrent device. Thisfeature locks the steering columnwhen the vehicle is turned off andthe driver door is opened, or whenthe driver door is opened and thenthe vehicle is turned off. Thesteering column unlocks when thevehicle is turned on.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)may display one of thesemessages:

. A message to service thesteering column lock indicatesthat an issue has been detectedwith the column lock feature andthe vehicle should be serviced.

. A message that the steeringcolumn is locked indicates thatthe engine is running, but thesteering column is still locked.It is normal for the column to belocked during a remote start, butthe column should unlock afterthe brake pedal is pressed and

the vehicle is started. Nomessage will display during aremote start.

. A message that the steeringwheel must be turned and thevehicle must be started againindicates that the column lockmechanism is bound, the columnlocking device was unable tounlock the steering column, andthe vehicle did not start. If thishappens, immediately turn thesteering wheel from side to sideto unbind the column lock. If thisdoes not unlock the steeringcolumn, turn the vehicle off andopen the driver door to reset thesystem. Then turn the vehicle onand immediately turn thesteering wheel side to side forabout 15 seconds. In somecases, it may take significantforce to unbind the column.

To keep the steering column frombinding, straighten the front wheelsbefore turning off the vehicle.



ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 405.

Immobilizer Operation(Key Access)

This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the ignition is turnedfrom off to on.

The security light, in the instrumentcluster, comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. It may benecessary to check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers 0 315.If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See yourdealer.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementkeys. Up to eight keys can beprogrammed for the vehicle. Toprogram additional keys, see Keys(Keyless Access) 0 9 orKeys (Key Access) 0 10. Toprogram additional transmitters, seeyour dealer.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the vehicletheft system in the vehicle.

See your dealer to get a new keyblank cut exactly as the ignition keythat operates the system.

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the transmitterleaves the vehicle.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when ENGINE START/STOP is pressed and a validtransmitter is found in the vehicle.



The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on when there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the vehicle will not change ignitionmodes (ACC/ACCESSORY, on, off),and the RKE transmitter appears tobe undamaged, try anothertransmitter. Or, you may try placingthe transmitter in the frontcupholder. See “Starting the Vehiclewith a Low Transmitter Battery”

under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

If the engine does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket in thefront cupholder, the vehicle needsservice. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.

Do not leave the transmitter ordevice that disarms or deactivatesthe theft-deterrent system in thevehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

Shown with Power FoldingMirrors, Manual Folding Similar

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.The indicator light comes on.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Adjust the outside mirror sothat the side of the vehicle andthe area behind are seen.

4. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror. Theindicator light goes off.

Exterior Automatic DimmingMirror

If equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlamps behind. This featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror 0 41.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may also have a turnsignal indicator on the mirror. Anarrow on the mirror flashes in thedirection of the turn or lane change.

Folding Mirrors

Power Folding

To adjust power folding mirrors,if equipped:

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.



Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

. They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

. The mirrors will not stay in theunfolded position.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfolding mirrors. This sound is normalafter a manual folding operation.

Remote Mirror Folding

If equipped, press and hold Q onthe RKE transmitter forapproximately one second toautomatically fold the exteriormirrors. Press and hold K on theRKE transmitter for approximately

one second to unfold. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Key Access) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

This feature is turned on or offthrough vehicle personalization. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Manual Folding

Fold the mirrors inward to preventdamage when going through anautomatic car wash. To fold, pull themirror toward the vehicle. Push themirror outward, to return to itsoriginal position.

Heated MirrorsK : Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 175.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf the vehicle has the automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of the headlamps from behind.

Blind Spot MirrorsIf equipped, there is a small convexmirror built into the upper and outercorner of the driver outside mirror.It can show objects that may be inthe vehicle's blind zone.



Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicleis a long distance away, theimage in the main mirror issmall and near the inboardedge of the mirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitionsfrom the main mirror to theblind spot mirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appearsin the blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spot

mirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double checkbefore moving slowly into theadjacent lane.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tiltsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the curb to be seen whenparallel parking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 152.



Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, the vehiclemay have three control buttons atthe bottom of the mirror. See OnStarOverview 0 410.

To avoid accidental OnStar calls,clean the mirror with the ignition off.Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of headlampsfrom behind. The dimming featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted.

Child-View Mirror

If equipped, the child-view mirror ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover to release.Push the mirror back up when notin use.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter or keys in avehicle with children. When thereare children in the rear seat, usethe window lockout button toprevent operation of the windows.See Keys (Keyless Access) 0 9orKeys (Key Access) 0 10.

The power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 209.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Window Lockout

This feature stops the rearpassenger window switches fromworking.

. PressZ to engage the rearwindow lockout feature. Theindicator light is on whenengaged.

. PressZ again to disengage.

Window Express Movement

All windows can be opened withoutholding the window switch. Pressthe switch down fully and quicklyrelease to express open thewindow.

If equipped, pull the window switchup fully and quickly release toexpress close the window.



Briefly press or pull the windowswitch in the same direction to stopthat window’s express movement.

Window Automatic ReversalSystem

The express-close feature willreverse window movement if itcomes in contact with an object.Extreme cold or ice could cause thewindow to auto-reverse. Thewindow will operate normally afterthe object or condition is removed.

Automatic Reversal SystemOverride

{ Warning

If automatic reversal systemoverride is active, the window willnot reverse automatically. You orothers could be injured and thewindow could be damaged.Before using automatic reversalsystem override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

When the engine is on, override theautomatic reversal system by pullingand holding the window switch ifconditions prevent it from closing.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming may be necessary ifthe vehicle battery has beendisconnected or discharged. If thewindow is unable to express-up,program each express-closewindow:

1. Close all doors.

2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Partially open the window to beprogrammed. Then close it andcontinue to pull the switchbriefly after the window hasfully closed.

4. Open the window and continueto press the switch briefly afterthe window has fully opened.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature allows thewindows to be opened remotely.If enabled in vehicle personalization,press and hold K on the RKEtransmitter. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow and, if equipped, extendalong the rod.



Roof

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof onlyoperates when the ignition is on orin ACC/ACCESSORY, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 209.

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release I (1). To

express-close the sunroof, fully

press and releaseK (1). Press

the switch again to stop themovement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press and hold I(1). Release the switch at thedesired position. Press and holdK (1) to close the sunroof.Release the switch at the desiredposition.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position,pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof.

PressK (2) to close the

sunroof vent.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually whenthe sunroof is in the vent or fullyclosed position.

Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof has an automaticreversal system that is only activewhen the sunroof is operated inexpress-close mode.

If an object is in the path whileexpress closing, the reversal systemwill detect an object, stop, and openthe sunroof slightly.

If frost or other conditions preventclosing, override the feature byclosing the sunroof in manual mode.To stop movement, release theswitch.



Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.


46 Seats and Restraints

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Front SeatsCenter Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 48Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 50Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Heated and Ventilated Front

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62How to Wear Seat Belts

Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Seat Belt Use During

Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 71Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Replacing Seat Belt System

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 75When Should an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78How Does an Airbag

Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78What Will You See after an

Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Passenger Sensing System . . . 80Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Adding Equipment to the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 84Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 85Replacing Airbag System Parts

after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Infants and Young Children . . . . 88Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 90Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 92Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) . . . . 93Replacing LATCH System

Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 103Securing Child Restraints (With

the Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the CenterFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . 106


Seats and Restraints 47

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.



Second Row Seats

The vehicle's second row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The second row seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Third Row Seats

The third row seat head restraintcan be lowered to allow for bettervisibility when the rear seat isunoccupied.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on the top of theseatback and push the headrestraint down.

Return the lowered head restraint tothe upright position until it locks intoplace. Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure it is locked.

If you are installing a child restraintin the third row seat, see “Securinga Child Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 93.

Front Seats

Center SeatIf equipped, the center frontseatback doubles as an armrest andcupholder/storage area for the driverand passenger when the centerfront seat is not used. Do not use itas a seating position when theseatback is folded down.

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.



{ Warning

The power seats will work withthe ignition off. Children couldoperate the power seats and beinjured. Never leave childrenalone in the vehicle.

To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks 0 50.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment 0 49.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibratingpulse alert in the driver seat to helpthe driver avoid crashes. See DriverAssistance Systems 0 240.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:

. If equipped, press and hold thecontrol forward to increase orrearward to decrease upper andlower lumbar support at thesame time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.



Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the seat belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear theseat belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Memory Seats

If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to save and recall theirunique seat positions for driving thevehicle, and a shared exit positionfor getting out of the vehicle. Otherfeature positions may also besaved, such as power mirrors andpower steering wheel, if equipped.Memory positions are linked to RKEtransmitter 1 or 2 for automaticmemory recalls.

Before saving, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn thevehicle on and then press andrelease SET; a beep will sound.

Then immediately press and hold 1,2, orB (Exit) until two beepssound. To manually recall thesepositions, press and hold 1, 2, orBuntil the saved position is reached.Follow the instructions under“Saving Memory Positions.”

The vehicle identifies the currentdriver’s RKE transmitter number (1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16. Only RKE transmitters 1 and 2can be used for automatic memoryrecalls. A Driver Information Center(DIC) welcome message indicatingthe transmitter number may displayfor the first few ignition cyclesfollowing a transmitter change. ForAuto Memory Recall to workproperly, save the positions to thememory button (1 or 2) matching theRKE transmitter number displayedin the DIC welcome message. Carrythe linked RKE transmitter whenentering the vehicle.

Vehicle Personalization Settings

. To have the Auto Memory Recallmovement begin when thevehicle is started, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle,then Comfort and Convenience,and then Auto Memory Recall.Select On or Off. See “AutoMemory Recall” later in thissection.

. To begin Easy Exit Recallmovement when the vehicle isturned off and the driver door isopened, or when the vehicle isturned off with the driver dooralready opened, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle,then Comfort and Convenience,and then Easy Exit Options.Select On or Off. See “Easy ExitRecall” later in this section.

. See Vehicle Personalization0 152 for additional settinginformation.



Identifying Driver Number

To identify the driver number:

1. Move your RKE transmitteraway from the vehicle.

2. Start the vehicle with anotherkey or RKE transmitter. TheDIC should display the drivernumber for the other RKEtransmitter. Turn the vehicle offand remove the key or RKEtransmitter from the vehicle.

3. Start the vehicle with the initialkey or RKE transmitter. TheDIC should display the drivernumber of your RKEtransmitter.

Saving Memory Positions

Read these instructions completelybefore saving memory positions.

To save preferred driving positions1 and 2:

1. Turn the vehicle on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

A DIC welcome message mayindicate driver number 1 or 2.

2. Adjust all available memoryfeatures to the desired drivingposition.

3. Press and release SET; a beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold the1 or 2 memory button matchingthe above DIC welcomemessage until two beepssound.

If too much time passesbetween releasing SET andpressing 1, the memoryposition will not be saved andtwo beeps will not sound.Repeat Steps 3 and 4.

1 or 2 corresponds to the drivernumber. See “Identifying DriverNumber” previously in thissection.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 1 or 2.

To save the position forB andEasy Exit Recall features, repeatSteps 1–4 usingB. This saves theposition for getting out of thevehicle.

Save preferred memory featurepositions to both 1 and 2 if you arethe only driver.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB to recallthe previously saved memorypositions if you are driver 1 or 2identified in the DIC welcomemessage. RKE transmitters 3–8 willnot recall memory positions.

To stop Manual Memory recallmovement, release 1, 2, orB orpress any of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected

. Power steering wheel,if equipped



Auto Memory Recall

The vehicle identifies the number ofthe current driver’s RKE transmitter(1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16. If the RKE transmitter is 1 or2, and Auto Memory Recall isenabled in vehicle personalization,the positions saved to the samememory button number 1 or 2 areautomatically recalled when thevehicle is turned on, or turned fromoff to ACC/ACCESSORY. RKEtransmitters 3–8 will not provideautomatic memory recalls.

To turn Auto Memory Recall on oroff, see “Vehicle PersonalizationSettings” previously in this sectionand Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)to start Auto Memory Recall. AutoMemory Recall will complete if thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park)prior to reaching the saved memoryposition.

To stop Auto Memory Recallmovement, turn the vehicle off orpress any of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB



If the saved memory seat positiondoes not automatically recall orrecalls to the wrong positions, thedriver’s RKE transmitter number (1or 2) may not match the memorybutton number that positions weresaved to. Try storing the position tothe other memory button or try theother RKE transmitter.

Easy Exit Recall

Easy Exit Recall is not linked to anRKE transmitter. The position savedtoB is used for all drivers. To turnEasy Exit Recall on or off, see"Vehicle Personalization Settings"previously in this section andVehicle Personalization 0 152.

If turned on, the position saved toB is automatically recalled whenone of the following occurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

To stop Easy Exit Recall movement,press any of the following memorycontrols:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB



Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or power steering wheelwhile recalling a memory position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction and try the recall again.If the memory position still does notrecall, see your dealer.



Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, use carewhen using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

The buttons are on the center stackbelow the climate control system. Tooperate, the engine must berunning.

PressI to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

If equipped, press C to ventilate thedriver or passenger seat.

The indicator light on the buttoncomes on when this feature is on.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the heated seats are onhigh for an extended time, their levelmay automatically be lowered.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Auto Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start, the heated orventilated seats can be turned onautomatically. When it is coldoutside, the heated seats turn on,and when it is hot outside theventilated seats turn on. The heatedor ventilated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe heated or ventilated seat buttonto use the heated or ventilated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights do not turn on duringa remote start.



The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in thevehicle personalization menu. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 23 andVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Rear SeatsRear Seat Reminder

If equipped, the message REARSEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REARSEAT displays under certainconditions indicating there may bean item or passenger in the rearseat. Check before exiting thevehicle.

This feature will activate when asecond row door is opened whilethe vehicle is on or up to 10 minutesbefore the vehicle is turned on.There will be an alert when thevehicle is turned off. The alert doesnot directly detect objects in the rearseat; instead, under certainconditions, it detects when a reardoor is opened and closed,indicating that there may besomething in the rear seat.

The feature is active only once eachtime the vehicle is turned on and off,and will require reactivation byopening and closing the second rowdoors. There may be an alert evenwhen there is nothing in the rearseat; for example, if a child entered

the vehicle through the rear doorand left the vehicle without thevehicle being shut off.

The feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

Heated Rear Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. See theWarning under Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 54.



If equipped, the buttons are on therear of the center console.

Press M or L to heat the leftoutboard or right outboard seatcushion.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat changesto the next lower setting, and thenthe off setting. Indicator lights on thebutton show the setting: three forhigh, two for medium, and onefor low.

If the heated seats are on high foran extended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

Second Row Seats

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully whileapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.If the lever is lifted withoutapplying pressure, the seat willrelease to a folded position.

2. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

The second row seats can be foldedfor additional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exitto the third row seat.



Manual Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seatin a tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbledseat is not locked. It can movewhen the vehicle is in motion.People in the vehicle could beinjured in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position beforedriving the vehicle. Push and pullon the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seatbelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or onthe seat.

2. Lift the lever, on the outboardside of the seat, to release theseatback.

The seatback will fold forwardto create a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seatforward and/or put the frontseatback in the uprightposition.



3. Lift the lever again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

4. The rear pull strap can also beused to fold or fold and tumblethe seat. It is easier to tumblethe seat with the rear pull straponce the seat is folded flat.

Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Third Row Seat

{ Warning

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat:


2. Pull the strap on the bottomrear of the second row seat torelease the seatback. Theseatback will fold forward.



3. Pull the strap again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Fold and TumbleFeature (If Equipped)

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seatin a tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbledseat is not locked. It can movewhen the vehicle is in motion.People in the vehicle could beinjured in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position beforedriving the vehicle. Push and pullon the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

{ Warning

Automatically folding andtumbling the seat when someoneis sitting in the seat, could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release switch.

Caution


The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

Fold the seat to load cargo. Foldand tumble the seat for entry to thethird row.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:


Driver Side Rear Panel Switch

2. Press the automatic seatrelease switch on the panelbehind the rear doors. Theseatback automaticallyfolds flat.

3. Press the switch again torelease the rear of the seatfrom the floor. The seat willtumble forward.



Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Cargo Area

1. Second Row Power SeatSwitches

2. Third Row Power SeatSwitches

To fold and tumble the seat from thecargo area:


2. Press the switch (1) on the sidetrim of the cargo area to foldthe seatback.

The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

3. Press the switch again torelease the rear of the seatfrom the floor. The seat willtumble forward.

The switches (2) can be used to foldand unfold the third row seatbacksfrom the cargo area. See Third RowSeats 0 60.

Returning the Seat to theSitting Position

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seat to the sittingposition from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until bothsides of the seat are latched tothe floor. Make sure the seat issecurely latched to the floorbefore raising the seatback.If both sides are not latched tothe floor, the seatback will notraise.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.

Third Row Seats

Folding the Seatback

Caution


The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.



The third row seatbacks can befolded to increase cargo space.

1. Second Row Power SeatFold and Tumble Switches,if equipped.

2. Third Row Power Seat Foldand Raise Switches,if equipped.

To fold the seatback:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the third row seat.


3. Fully lower the head restraints.See Head Restraints 0 47. Putthe second row seatback in theupright position. See SecondRow Seats 0 56.

4. Disconnect the rear seat beltmini-latch, using a key in theslot on the mini-buckle, and letthe belt retract into theheadliner.

5. Stow the mini-latch in theholder in the headliner.

6. Press and hold the switch (2)on the side trim of the cargoarea to fold the third rowseatback.

The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

7. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

The switches (1) can be used to foldor fold and tumble the second rowseats from the cargo area. SeeSecond Row Seats 0 56.



Returning the Third RowSeatback to the UprightPosition

1. Second Row Power SeatFold and Tumble Switches

2. Third Row Power Seat Foldand Raise Switches

To return the third row seatback tothe upright position:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Press and hold the switch (2)on the side trim of the cargoarea to raise the third rowseatback.

The left switch raises the leftseatback, and the right switchraises the right seatback.

{ Warning

A seat belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the seat belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center seat beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.

4. Pull on the seat belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

5. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

Seat BeltsThis section describes how to useseat belts properly, and some thingsnot to do.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where aseat belt cannot be worn properly.In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingseat belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingseat belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts.See Seat Belt Reminders 0 133.

Why Seat Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the seatbelts. That is why wearing seat beltsmakes such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seatbelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only. They work withseat belts — not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag isprovided, all occupants still haveto buckle up to get the mostprotection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyFollow these rules for everyone'sprotection.

There are additional things to knowabout seat belts and children,including smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children 0 86 orInfants and Young Children 0 88.Review and follow the rules forchildren in addition to the followingrules.



It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing seat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front ofyou (if possible).

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,

this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour seat belt properly.

Never allow the lap or shoulder beltto become loose or twisted.



Never wear the shoulder belt underboth arms or behind your back.

Always use the correct buckle foryour seating position.

Never route the lap or shoulder beltover an armrest.

{ Warning

The seat belt can be pinched if itis routed under plastic trim on theseat, such as trim around the rearseatback folding handle or sideairbag. In a crash, pinched seatbelts might not be able to provideadequate protection. Never allowseat belts to be routed underplastic trim pieces.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe center front passenger position,if equipped, which has a lap belt.See Lap Belt 0 71.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable seat belt,and the seat belt is not attached,see Third Row Seats 0 60 forinstructions on reconnecting theseat belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.



1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraint

locking feature may beengaged. See Child RestraintSystems 0 90. If this occurs, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again. If the lockingfeature stays engaged afterletting the belt go back tostowed position on the seat,move the seat rearward orrecline the seat until theshoulder belt retractor lockreleases.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem. See PassengerSensing System 0 80.

For front seating positions,if the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSeat Belt Extender 0 71.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See

“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”in this section for instructionson use and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

For third row seats, it may benecessary to pull stitching onthe seat belt through the latchplate to fully tighten the lap belton smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

For third row seats, slide the latchplate up the safety webbing whenthe seat belt is not in use. The latchplate should rest on the stitching onthe seat belt.

Always stow the seat belt slowly.If the seat belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull theseat belt straight out firmly to unlockthe webbing, and then release it.If the webbing is still locked in theretractor, see your dealer.



Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a dooris slammed against a seat belt,damage can occur to both the seatbelt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andfront outboard passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe seat belt in a crash. See How toWear Seat Belts Properly 0 63.

Push down on the release button tomove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

Move the adjuster up by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has seat beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the seat beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they

are part of the seat belt assembly.They can help tighten the seat beltsduring the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. Seat beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe seat belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's seat beltsystem will need to be replaced.See Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 72.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicleor at any time while sitting in theseat. Sitting on the seat belt candamage the webbing and hardware.



Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

{ Warning

A seat belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

Rear seat belt comfort guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort forolder children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt,the comfort guide positions theshoulder belt away from the neckand head.

Second Row Outboard SeatingPositions

The vehicle has comfort guides forthe second row outboard seatingpositions. The comfort guides arestored on a clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

To install:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide onthe front.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe seat belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the seat belt can beremoved from the guide. Slide theguide onto its storage clip.

Third Row Seating Positions

Comfort guides are availablethrough your dealer for third rowseating positions. Instructions areincluded with the guides.

Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear seat belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a seatbelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making seatbelts effective is wearing themproperly.



Lap BeltThis section is only for the lap belt.To learn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 65.

The vehicle may have a centerseating position with a lap seat belt.The lap seat belt does not have aretractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position, and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSeat Belt Extender 0 71.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the seat beltquickly if necessary.

If you find that the latch plate willnot go fully into the buckle, see ifyou are using the correct buckle. Besure that the latch plate clicks wheninserted into the buckle.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you anextender. When you go in to order it,take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enoughfor you. To help avoid personalinjury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it forsecuring child restraints. For moreinformation on the proper use and fitof seat belt extenders see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder beltheight adjusters (if equipped), andseat belt anchorages to make surethey are all in working order. Lookfor any other loose or damaged seatbelt system parts that might keep a



seat belt system from performingproperly. See your dealer to have itrepaired. Torn, frayed, or twistedseat belts may not protect you in acrash. Torn or frayed seat belts canrip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, have itreplaced immediately. If a belt istwisted, it may be possible tountwist by reversing the latch plateon the webbing. If the twist cannotbe corrected, ask your dealer tofix it.

Make sure the seat belt reminderlight is working. See Seat BeltReminders 0 133.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. SeeSeat Belt Care 0 72.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

Seat belts should be properly caredfor and maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be keptdry and free of dust or debris. Asnecessary, exterior hard surfacesand seat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.

Ensure there is not excessive dustor debris in the mechanism. If dustor debris exists in the system pleasesee the dealer. Parts may need tobe replaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.

Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the seat belt systems areworking properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary.But the seat belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the seatbelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.



New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 134.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger

The vehicle may have the followingairbag:

. A front center airbag for thedriver and front outboardpassenger

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on anattached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For the front center airbag, the wordAIRBAG is on the inboard side ofthe driver seatback.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback or side of theseat closest to the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seatbelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:



{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are notdesigned to inflate in every crash.In some crashes seat belts arethe only restraint. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 77.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe seat belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a seat beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Seat belts help keep youin position before and during acrash. Always wear a seat belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the front centerarmrest or console in vehicleswith a front center airbag.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 86 orInfants and Young Children 0 88.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 134.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



If the vehicle has a front centerairbag, it is in the inboard side of thedriver seatback.


The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.


The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond and third row outboardseating positions are in the ceilingabove the side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat or consoleaccessories that block theinflation path of a seat-mountedside impact airbag or the frontcenter airbag, if equipped.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie-downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System 0 73.Airbags are designed to inflate if theimpact exceeds the specific airbagsystem's deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds are used topredict how severe a crash is likelyto be in time for the airbags toinflate and help restrain theoccupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

The vehicle also has a seat positionsensor that enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used toadjust the deployment of the driverfrontal airbag.

The front center airbag, if equipped,is designed to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes depending

upon the location of the impact,when either side of the vehicle isstruck. In addition, the front centerairbag is designed to inflate whenthe sensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside. The front center airbag is notdesigned to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate in



rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or the repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 75.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 77.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto seat belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After frontal and seat-mounted sideimpact airbags inflate, they quicklydeflate, so quickly that some peoplemay not even realize the airbagsinflated. The front center airbag androof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 75.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflated



airbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off the

fuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. After turning the ignitionoff and then on again, the fuelsystem will return to normaloperation; the doors can be locked,the interior lamps can be turned off,and the hazard warning flashers canbe turned off using the controls forthose features. If any of thesesystems are damaged in the crashthey may not operate as normal.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a



crash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy 0 407andEvent Data Recorders 0 408.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator 0 135.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand seat belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant and

determine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

passenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure child restraints in the rearseat. Consider using anothervehicle to transport the childwhen a rear seat is not available.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied.

. The system determines an infantis present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the OFF indicator will light and staylit as a reminder that the airbag isoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 135.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the ON indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a seat belt properly — whetheror not there is an airbag for thatperson.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced right

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

away. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 134 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the ON indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraint

manufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the CenterFront Seat) 0 105 orSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)0 103 orSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the FrontPassenger Seat) 0 106.

Make sure the seat beltretractor is locked by pullingthe shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor wheninstalling the child restraint,even if the child restraint isequipped with a seat belt lockoff. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightenedbut not pulled out of theretractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the ON indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to make

sure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 47.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rearseat. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even if theON indicator is not lit.



If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the OFF indicator is lit, it couldbe because that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:


2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such asblankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters, or seatmassagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way,the child restraint lockingfeature will be engaged. Thismay unintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way,and then buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and havethe person remain in thisposition for two to three minutesafter the ON indicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag OFF indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Seat belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat duringvehicle maneuvers and braking,which helps the passenger sensingsystem maintain the passengerairbag status. See “Seat Belts” and“Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.



A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 84for more information aboutmodifications that can affect howthe system operates.

The ON indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seePublication Ordering Information0 405.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

are close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing,including improperly repairing orreplacing, any parts of the following:

. Airbag system, including airbagmodules, front or side impactsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule, airbag wiring, or frontcenter console


Seats and Restraints 85. Front seats, including stitching,

seams or zippers

. Seat belts

. Steering wheel, instrumentpanel, overhead console, ceilingtrim, or pillar garnish trim

. Inner door seals, includingspeakers

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag modules and sensors,sensing and diagnostic module, andairbag wiring along with the properreplacement procedures.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger's seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pador device, installed under or on top

of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System0 80.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 344 for additionalimportant information.

If the vehicle must be modifiedbecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 398.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 134.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 75. See your dealerfor service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot properly protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 134.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s seat belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear seat beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 65.If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.



If you have the choice, a childshould sit in a position with alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way towear seat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 65.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use seat beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same seat belt. Theseat belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A seat belt mustbe used by only one person ata time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear theseat belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes the

need, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the seatbelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's seat belt system nor itsairbag system is designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriate childrestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injured

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimescalled child seats or car seats.

There are three basic types ofchild restraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rear-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint,there are many different modelsavailable. When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle. If it is, thechild restraint will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The instruction manual that isprovided with the child restraintstates the weight and heightlimitations for that particular child



restraint. In addition, there are manykinds of child restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle seat beltmay not remain low on the hipbones, as it should. Instead, itmay settle up around the child'sabdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body areathat is unprotected by any bonystructure. This alone could causeserious or fatal injuries. To reduce

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the risk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, young childrenshould always be secured in anappropriate child restraint.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.



Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat isused for children who haveoutgrown their forward-facing childrestraint. Boosters are designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle's seatbelt system until the child is largeenough for the vehicle seat belts tofit properly without a booster seat.See the seat belt fit test in OlderChildren 0 86.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraints mustbe secured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 93 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the following:

1. Instruction labels provided onthe child restraint

2. Instruction manual providedwith the child restraint

3. This vehicle owner's manual

The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seat



inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

The vehicle may be equipped with afront center airbag in the inboardside of the driver seat. Even with afront center airbag, a child restraintcan be installed in any second rowseating position.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 80 for additional information.



{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent seat belts orLATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.Adjacent seating positions shouldnot be used if the child restraintprevents access to or interferes withthe routing of the seat belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint and secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s seat belts. Do not useboth the seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.



Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child and thebooster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or the seatbelts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

For a forward-facing 5-pt harnesschild restraint where the combinedweight of the child and restraint areup to 29.5 kg (65 lb), use either thelower LATCH anchorages with thetop tether anchorage, or the seatbelt with the top tether anchorage.Where the combined weight of thechild and restraint are greater than29.5 kg (65 lb), use the seat belt withthe top tether anchorage only.



Recommended Methods for Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type CombinedWeight of theChild + ChildRestraint

Use Only Approved Attachment Methods Shown with an X

LATCH – LowerAnchors Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH – LowerAnchors and TopTether Anchor

Seat Belt andTop TetherAnchor

Rear-FacingChild Restraint

Up to29.5 kg (65 lb)

X X

Rear-FacingChild Restraint

Greater than29.5 kg (65 lb)

X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

Up to29.5 kg (65 lb)

X X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

Greater than29.5 kg (65 lb)

X

See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Center FrontSeat) 0 105 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 103 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front PassengerSeat) 0 106.

Child restraints built after March2014 will be labeled with thespecific child weight up to which theLATCH system can be used toinstall the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positionshave lower anchors. In this case,the seat belt must be used (with top

tether where available) to securethe child restraint. See SecuringChild Restraints (With the Seat Beltin the Center Front Seat) 0 105 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 103 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front PassengerSeat) 0 106.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3,4) is used to securethe top of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a single attachmenthook (2) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — 60/40

H : Seating positions with twolower anchors.

I : Seating positions with toptether anchors.

Second Row — Bucket

H : Seating positions with twolower anchors.


Third Row Seat


To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.



To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is near the top tetheranchors for second row seats. Forthird row seats, the top tetheranchor symbol is on the flipperpanel. Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with bucket second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seatcushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use ananchor located directly behind theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seatcushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use ananchor located directly behind theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.



Third Row Seat

For the third row seat, the top tetheranchors are on the back of theseatback. Move the flipper panelrearward to access the anchors. Besure to use an anchor locateddirectly behind the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 92 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

A child could be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attachedto the vehicle using either theLATCH anchors or the vehicleseat belt. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s seat belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled seat belts to avoidrubbing the LATCH attachments.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the rear seatbackwhen the seat is occupied. Do notfold the empty rear seat with aseat belt buckled. This coulddamage the seat belt or the seat.Unbuckle and return the seat beltto its stowed position, beforefolding the seat.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint canbe installed in any second rowseating position.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 92.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the seat belt and

top tether when recommendedby the child restraintmanufacturer. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual. Forthe third row outboard seatingpositions, if the head restraintinterferes with the properinstallation of the childrestraint, then the headrestraint may be removed. See“Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 93.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,



attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tetheranchor.

For the third row seat,move the flipper panelrearward to access thetop tether anchors.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraint

and you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, raise theheadrest or head restraintand route the tetherunder the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route the



tether around the inboardor outboard side of theheadrest or headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed or anadjustable head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There should

be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Third Row Seats0 60 for additional information.

2. Press the buttons on the headrestraint posts and pull up onthe head restraint.

3. Route the top tether of the childrestraint under the headrestraint.

4. With the head restraint facingrearward, insert the headrestraint posts into the holes inthe top of the seatback.

5. Push the head restraint down.

6. Try to move the head restraintto make sure that it is locked inplace.

7. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.



{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 93 for how and where to

install the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using a seatbelt and it uses a top tether, seeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 93 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seatbelt to secure the child restraint. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 92.



1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For the third row outboardseating positions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of the childrestraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 93.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle seat belt throughor around the child restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check to see ifthe correct buckle isbeing used.

Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the childrestraint and see LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 93.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

If the head restraint was removedfor a third row outboard seatingposition, reinstall it before theseating position is used. See “Head

Restraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 93 for additionalinformation on reinstalling the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theCenter Front Seat)

{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.



Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 92.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 80andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 135 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

forward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 80 for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 93 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or theseatback to an upright position,if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the childrestraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the OFF indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 135.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle seat belt through

or around the child restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt, if needed.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

If the airbag is off, the OFF indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the ON indicator is lit, see “Ifthe On Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 80.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 109

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 109Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 110Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Center Console Storage . . . . . . 110Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 111

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Glove BoxLift up the glove box handle to openit. Use the key to lock and unlockthe glove box.

CupholdersThe cupholders are in front of thecenter console storage area.

Press the button to open the door,if equipped.

If the cupholder door is closed, it willlock if the vehicle is in a crash. Seeyour dealer to have the doorunlocked.

If equipped, cupholders are in thesecond and third row seat armrests.


110 Storage

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover andrelease to access.

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seatarmrest, pull the loop at the top ofthe armrest down to access thecupholders.

Rear Storage

There is storage in the floor of therear cargo area. Lift the handle toaccess. There is a removabledivider to help organize.

Center Console Storage

Bench Seat

If equipped, pull the front centerarmrest down to access thestorage area.


Storage 111

Bench Seat

If equipped, pull the front centerseat armrest down to access thestorage area with cupholders.

Press the button and lift to open.There is a removable divider.

Bucket Seat

If equipped, press the latch and liftto open. Depending on the optionsthere may be a tote compartment,accessory power outlet, auxiliaryjack, and USB port(s) inside.

Floor Console Storage

If equipped with front center seatstorage, unlock with the ignition key,press the latch, and lift to open.


112 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

There are two cargo tie-downs inthe rear cargo area. These can beused to strap cargo down and keepit from moving inside the vehicle.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack — like paneling,plywood, or a mattress — thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the roof rack can beused to load items. For roof racksthat do not have crossrails included,GM Certified crossrails can bepurchased as an accessory. Seeyour dealer for additionalinformation.

Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rackthat weighs more than 100 kg(220 lb) or hangs over the rear orsides of the vehicle may damagethe vehicle. Do not load cargoexceeding 100 kg (220 lbs) andalways load cargo so that it restsevenly between the crossrails anddoes not block the vehicle lampsor windows. Fasten the cargosecurely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace.


Storage 113

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 196.

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the rearwindow glass. Make sure itemsloaded on the roof of the vehicle donot block or damage the CHMSL.


114 Instruments and Controls

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 115Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 116Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 116Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 116Rear Window Wiper/

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Engine Oil Pressure

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Transmission TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 133Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 134Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Charging System Light . . . . . . . 135Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 136Brake System Warning

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Antilock Brake System (ABS)

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . 139Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 139Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 140Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 140Traction Control System (TCS)/

StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 141Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 142Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 142

Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 143Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 143Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 143Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 144Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Information DisplaysDriver Information

Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . 147

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Engine Power Messages . . . . . 151Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 152

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 152

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . 160Universal Remote System

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Universal Remote System

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163


Instruments and Controls 115

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel andpull the lever.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Tilt and Telescoping SteeringWheel

To adjust the tilt and telescopingsteering wheel, if equipped:

1. Push the lever (1) down tomove the steering wheelforward or rearward. Lift thelever (1) up to lock the wheel inplace.

2. Hold the steering wheel andpull the lever (2) toward you tomove the steering wheel up ordown. Release the lever (2) tolock the wheel into place.

Power Tilt and TelescopingSteering Wheel

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel,if equipped:

Press the control to move thesteering wheel up and down orforward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.



Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See “Steering WheelControls” in the infotainmentmanual.

Heated Steering Wheel

( : If equipped, press to turn theheated steering wheel on or off.A light next to the button displayswhen the feature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

To sound the horn, pressa on thesteering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withzFRONT on it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : If Rainsense is turned off,turn thez FRONT band up for

more frequent wipes or down forless frequent wipes. If Rainsense isturned on, see Rainsense later inthis section.

OFF : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes,

hold the band on8 longer.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement 0 309.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. An internal circuitbreaker to the motor will stop themotor until it cools down.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.



{ Warning

Before driving the vehicle, alwaysclear snow and ice from the hood,windshield, roof, and rear of thevehicle, including all lamps andwindows. Reduced visibility fromsnow and ice buildup could leadto a crash.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are onw,1, or3 INT,they will immediately stop.

Ifz FRONT is then moved toOFF before the driver door isopened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing or Rainsense,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Rainsense

If equipped with Rainsense, asensor near the top center of thewindshield detects the amount ofwater on the windshield andcontrols the frequency of thewindshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

3 INT : Turn thez FRONTband on the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity when Rainsense isturned on.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down to lower INTsetting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

z AUTO : Press to turnRainsense on or off. When turnedon andz FRONT is in one of the

Rainsense wipe sensitivity positionsthe wipers can be adjusted for moreor less sensitivity to moisture. Whenturned off, the wipers operate astimed intermittent wipers and can beadjusted for more or less frequentwipes.

Ifz AUTO is turned on when the

ignition is turned on, or if the ignition

is in on and thez FRONT band

is in one of the sensitivity settings



whenz AUTO is turned on or off,

a message may display indicating ifRainsense was turned on or off.

If the ignition is in on andzFRONT is not in one of the

sensitivity settings whenz AUTO

is turned on, a message maydisplay indicating that the wiperband must be in one of thesensitivity settings for Rainsense tooperate.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever toOFF. This disables the automaticRainsense windshield wipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmissionis in N (Neutral) and the vehiclespeed is very slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Windshield Washer

L m : Push the paddle marked withthe windshield washer symbol at thetop of the turn signal lever to spraywasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thepaddle is released or the maximumwash time is reached. When thepaddle is released, additional wipesmay occur depending on how longthe windshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid 0 302for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper control is on the turnsignal lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

OFF : Turns the wiper off.

INT : Turns on the rear wiper with adelay between wipes.

ON : Turns on the rear wiper.

= REAR : Press this button on theend of the lever to spray washerfluid on the rear window. The wiperswill clear the rear window and eitherstop or return to your preset speed.For more washer cycles, press andhold the button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate or liftglassis open or ajar. If the liftgate orliftglass is opened while the rearwiper is on, the wiper returns to theparked position and stops.

Rear Wiper Arm AssemblyProtection

When using an automatic car wash,move the rear wiper control to OFFto disable the rear wiper. In somevehicles, if the transmission is inN (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the rear wiper willautomatically park under the rearspoiler.



The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performinginterval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid 0 302.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC),and vehicle speed information.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again.

Clock

Setting the Time and Date withCenter Stack Controls

To set the time or date:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select the desired function.

3. Turn the MENU knob toincrease or decrease the value.

4. Press the MENU knob to go tothe next value. After the lastvalue is selected, the systemwill update and return to theSettings menu. Press o BACKto go to the last menu andsave the changes.

Auto Set requires an active OnStaror connected service plan.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.



To set the clock display:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select Clock Display.

3. Turn the MENU knob to Offor On.

4. Press the MENU knob toselect.

Press o BACK to go to the lastmenu and save the changes.

Setting the Time and Date withInfotainment Display Controls

To set the time:

1. Touch SETTINGS on the HomePage, then touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Time, then touch «orª to increase or decreasehours, minutes, and AM or PM.Touch 12–24 Hr for 12 or24 hour clock.

3. Touch S to go back to theprevious menu.

Auto Set requires an active OnStaror connected service plan.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the date:


2. Touch Set Date, then touch «orª to increase or decreasemonth, day, or year.


To set the clock display:


2. Touch Clock Display, thentouch Off or On to turn theclock display off or on.


Power OutletsPower Outlets 12-Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have up to fiveaccessory power outlets:

Vehicles with a Center Console

. One in front of the cupholders onthe center console

. One inside the center storageconsole

. One on the rear of the centerstorage console

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side

. One in the rear cargo area onthe passenger side

Vehicles with Bench Seats

. One on the center stack belowthe climate control system


Instruments and Controls 121. One in the storage area on the

bench seat

. One on the rear of the centerarmrest storage

. One in the third row seat area onthe driver side

. One in the rear cargo area onthe passenger side

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

The accessory power outlets arepowered as follows:

. The power outlet near thecupholders for vehicles with acenter console or on the centerstack for vehicles with benchseats, can be configured tooperate using RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) orbattery power modes. If thesepower outlets are used while inthe battery power mode, thiscould cause interferencebetween the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter and thevehicle, and the vehicle may not

start. See Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) 0 202 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 204.

. The power outlets in the thirdrow seat area or in the rearcargo area are powered at alltimes. The power outlets insidethe storage area, on the rear ofthe console, or on the benchseat are only powered when theignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RAP isactive.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlet, if configured accordingly.Do not leave electrical equipmentplugged in when the vehicle is notin use because the vehicle couldcatch fire and cause injury ordeath.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the ignition is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum15 amp rating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 280.



Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110/120-VoltAlternating Current

If equipped with this power outlet, itcan be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.

For vehicles with a center console,the 110/120-volt power outlet is onthe rear of the center console.

For vehicles with bench seats, the110/120-volt power outlet is on thecenter stack below the climatecontrols.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is on,

equipment requiring less than 150watts is plugged into the outlet, andno system fault is detected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is off or if theequipment is not fully seated intothe outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the ignition off andthen back to on. The power restartswhen equipment using 150 watts orless is plugged into the outlet and asystem fault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such as

microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps

. Medical equipment

Wireless ChargingThe vehicle may have wirelesscharging on top of the centerconsole. See Center ConsoleStorage 0 110. The system operatesat 145 kHz and wirelessly chargesone Qi compatible smartphone. Thepower output of the system iscapable of charging at a rate up to1 amp (5W), as requested by thecompatible smartphone. See RadioFrequency Statement 0 405.

{ Warning

Wireless charging can affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medicaldevices. If you have one, it isrecommended to consult withyour doctor before using thewireless charging system.



The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must beactive. The wireless chargingfeature may not correctly indicatecharging when the vehicle is in RAP.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 209.

The operating temperature is −20 °C(−4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the smartphone.

{ Warning

Remove all objects from thecharging pad before chargingyour compatible smartphone.Objects, such as coins, keys,rings, paper clips, or cards,between the smartphone andcharging pad will become veryhot. On the rare occasion that thecharging system does not detectan object, and the object getswedged between the smartphoneand charger, remove the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

smartphone and allow the objectto cool before removing it fromthe charging pad, to preventburns.

To charge a compatible smartphone:

1. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system maynot charge if there are anyobjects between thesmartphone and charging pad.

2. Place the smartphone face upagainst the alignment rib on thecharge pad.

To maximize the charge rate,ensure the smartphone is fullyseated and centered in theholder with nothing under it.A thick smartphone case mayprevent the wireless chargerfrom working, or may reducethe charging performance. Seeyour dealer for additionalinformation.

3. The} will appear on the Von the infotainment display.This indicates that thesmartphone is properlypositioned and charging. If asmartphone is placed on thecharging pad and} does notdisplay, remove thesmartphone from the pad, turnit 180 degrees, and waitthree seconds before placing/aligning the smartphone on thepad again.



The smartphone may becomewarm during charging. This isnormal. In warmertemperatures, the speed ofcharging may be reduced.

Software Acknowledgements

Certain Wireless Charging Moduleproduct from LG Electronics, Inc.("LGE") contains the open sourcesoftware detailed below. Refer tothe indicated open source licenses(as are included following thisnotice) for the terms and conditionsof their use.

OSS Notice Information

To obtain the source code that iscontained in this product, pleasevisit http://opensource.lge.com. Inaddition to the source code, allreferred license terms, warrantydisclaimers and copyright noticesare available for download. LGElectronics will also provide opensource code to you on CD-ROM fora charge covering the cost ofperforming such distribution (suchas the cost of media, shipping, andhandling) upon email request [email protected]. This offer isvalid for three (3) years from thedate on which you purchased theproduct.

Freescale-WCT library

Copyright (c) 2012-2014 FreescaleSemiconductor, Inc.. All rightsreserved.

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, this list of conditionsand the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary formmust reproduce the abovecopyright notice, this list ofconditions and the followingdisclaimer in thedocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution.

3. Neither the name of thecopyright holder nor the namesof its contributors may be usedto endorse or promote productsderived from this softwarewithout specific prior writtenpermission.



THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDEDBY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERSAND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDEROR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OFTHE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



Denali English Standard Theme Shown, Metric Similar



Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display areain the center of the instrumentcluster.

Use the right steering wheel controlto open and scroll through thedifferent items and displays.

Press o to access the cluster

applications. Use w orx to scrollthrough the list of availableapplications. Not all applications willbe available on all vehicles.

. Info App. This is where theselected Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays can beviewed. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 144.

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Options

Audio

Press V to select the Audio app,

then press p to enter the Audiomenu. In the Audio menu browse formusic, select from the favorites,or change the audio source. Useworx to change the station or go tothe next or previous track.

Phone

Press V to select the Phone app,

then press p to enter the Phonemenu. In the Phone menu, if there isno active phone call, view recentcalls, or scroll through contacts.

If there is an active call, mute thephone or switch to handsetoperation.

Navigation

Press V to select the Navigation

app, then press p to enter theNavigation menu. If there is noactive route, you can resume thelast route and turn the voiceprompts on/off. If there is an activeroute, press V to cancel or resumeroute guidance or turn the voiceprompts on or off.

Options

Press V to select the Options app,

then press p to enter the Options

menu. Usew orx to scrollthrough items in the Options menu.

Units : Press p while Units is

displayed to enter the Units menu.Choose English or Metric units by

pressing V while the desired item is

highlighted. A checkmark will bedisplayed next to the selected item.



Display Themes (Denali) : Thereare three instrument cluster displayconfigurations to choose from:Standard, Technology, and Media.

Info Pages : Press p while Info

Pages is displayed to enter the InfoPages menu and select the items tobe displayed in the Info app. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 144.

Head-up Display (HUD) Rotation :If equipped, this feature allows foradjusting the angle of the HUDimage. The vehicle must be inP (Park). Press p on the steering

wheel controls while Head-upDisplay Rotation is highlighted to

enter Adjust Mode. Pressw orxto adjust the angle of the HUD

display. Press V to confirm and

save the setting. To cancel the

setting, press o.

Speed Warning : The SpeedWarning display allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want to

exceed. To set the Speed Warning,press p when Speed Warning is

displayed. Enable the speed

warning and then usew orx to

adjust the value. Press V to set the

speed. Once the speed is set, thisfeature can be turned off by

pressing V while viewing this page.

If the selected speed limit isexceeded, a pop-up warning isdisplayed with a chime.

Software Information : Displaysopen source software information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles. The odometerdisplays on the Speed page of theDriver Information Center (DIC).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 144.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).



Fuel Gauge

English Standard Theme Shown,Metric Similar

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuelgauge pointing to the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be refueled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric Standard Theme



English Standard Theme

The engine oil pressure gaugeshows the engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure can vary with enginespeed, outside temperature, and oilviscosity.

A reading outside the normaloperating range can be caused by adangerously low oil level or someother problem causing low oilpressure. Check the vehicle's oil as

soon as possible. An oil pressuremessage may display. See EngineOil 0 289.

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge





This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's enginecoolant.

While driving under normaloperating conditions, if the needlemoves into the red warning area,the engine is too hot. Pull off theroad, stop the vehicle, and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

TransmissionTemperature Gauge



This gauge appears when thevehicle is in Tow/Haul Mode andshows the transmission fluidtemperature. If the gauge is readingin the red area and/or a messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the vehicle must bestopped and the cause checked.One possible cause is a low fluidlevel in the transmission.



Caution

Do not drive the vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating,or the transmission can bedamaged. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty.

Voltmeter Gauge

Standard Theme

When the ignition is on, this gaugeindicates the battery voltage.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The gauge cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This isnormal. If the vehicle is operatingoutside the normal operating range,the charging system light comes on.See Charging System Light 0 135for more information. The voltmetergauge may also read lower when infuel economy mode. This is normal.

Readings outside the normaloperating range can also occurwhen a large number of electricalaccessories are operating in thevehicle and the engine is left idlingfor an extended period. Thiscondition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the readings outsidethe normal operating range. If the

vehicle must be driven, turn off allaccessories, such as the radio andair conditioner and unplug allchargers and accessories.

Readings outside the normaloperating range indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Seat Belt Reminders

Driver Seat Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver seat belt reminderlight on the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir seat belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue several



times if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Seat Belt ReminderLight

There may be a passenger seat beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 80.

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger seat belt reminder light,when the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirseat belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if the

passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger seat belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger seat beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe seat belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System 0 73.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.



Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 80 for importantsafety information. The passengerairbag status indicator is in theoverhead console.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, for severalseconds as a system check. Then,

after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF, or the on or off symbol, tolet you know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

with the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 134 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical charging



system. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays amessage.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is inService Mode. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) 0 202 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 204.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 283.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.



If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow theprevious guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. If fuel has been added to thevehicle using the capless fuelfunnel adapter, make sure that ithas been removed. See “Fillingthe Tank with a Portable GasCan” under Filling the Tank0 256. The diagnostic systemcan detect if the adapter hasbeen left installed in the vehicle,allowing fuel to evaporate into

the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the adapter removedmay turn off the light.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. SeeRecommended Fuel (L83 5.3LV8 Engine) 0 254 orRecommended Fuel (L86 6.2LV8 Engine) 0 254.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 280. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is inService Mode.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine driving



before the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLight

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the vehicle is turned on. If itdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

When the vehicle is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brake

does not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspectedright away.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The brake pedal might be harder topush, or the brake pedal may gocloser to the floor. It could takelonger to stop. If the light is still on,have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing the Vehicle 0 363.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This warning light should come onbriefly when the vehicle is turnedon. If the light does not come on,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn if there is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,safely stop as soon as it is possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then turnon the vehicle again to reset thesystem.

If the ABS warning light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light stays on.

If the ABS warning light is the onlylight on, the vehicle has regularbrakes, but ABS is not functioning.



If both the ABS warning light andthe brake system warning light areon, ABS is not functioning and thereis a problem with the regular brakes.See your dealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light0 138.

Four-Wheel-Drive Light

The four-wheel-drive light comes onwhen the transfer case is shiftedinto four-wheel drive and the frontaxle engages. LO or HI will also benext to this light when the vehicle isin four-wheel low or four-wheel high.

Some delay between the shiftingand the light coming on is normal.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 219.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 218.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light

After the vehicle is started, this lightturns off and stays off if LKA has notbeen turned on or is unavailable.

If available, this light is white if LKAis turned on, but not ready to assist.This light is green if LKA is turnedon and is ready to assist.

LKA may assist by gently turningthe steering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lanemarking. The LKA light is amberwhen assisting.

This light flashes amber as a LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) alert, toindicate that the lane marking hasbeen crossed.

LKA will not assist or alert if the turnsignal is active in the direction oflane departure, or if LKA detectsthat you are accelerating, braking,or actively steering.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 251.



Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay green when a vehicle isdetected ahead and amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 245.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrak/ESCbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak/ESCOFF light come on when StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 226.

StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system is turned off.If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If StabiliTrak/ESC and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak/ESCsystems, and the warning lightturns off.




Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ESC system have been disabled.A Driver Information Center (DIC)message may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak/ESCsystem is actively working.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light goes off.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

engine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating 0 300.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating 0 300.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.



When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. Stop as soon as possible,and inflate the tires to the pressurevalue shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See TirePressure 0 333.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 336.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.



Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation(Key Access) 0 36 orImmobilizer Operation (KeylessAccess) 0 36.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 166.

IntelliBeam Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled.

See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 164.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps 0 169.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use, exceptwhen only the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) are active. SeeExterior Lamp Controls 0 164.



Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhen the cruise control is on andready, and turns green when thecruise control is set and active.

See Cruise Control 0 230.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) ison and ready, and turns green whenthe ACC is set and active. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control 0 232.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster inthe Info app. See Instrument Cluster0 126. The displays show the statusof many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the rightsteering wheel control.

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.



o or p : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster.

V : Press to open a menu or selecta menu item. Press and hold toreset values on certain screens.

DIC Info Page Options

The info pages on the DIC can beturned on or off through theOptions menu.

1. Press o to access the clusterapplications.

2. Pressw orx to scroll to theOptions application.

3. Press V to enter theOptions menu.

4. Scroll to Info Pages andpress p.

5. Pressw orx to movethrough the list of possibleinformation displays.

6. Press V while an item ishighlighted to select ordeselect that item. When anitem is selected, a checkmarkwill appear next to it.

DIC Info Pages

The following is the list of allpossible DIC info page displays.Some may not be available for yourparticular vehicle. Some items maynot be turned on by default but canbe turned on through the Optionsapp. See “DIC Info Page Options”earlier in this section.

Speed : Shows the vehicle speed ineither kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph). The vehicleodometer is also shown onthis page.

Trip A or Trip B, Average FuelEconomy, and Average Speed :Shows the current distance traveled,in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), since the trip odometerwas last reset.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. This number reflects onlythe approximate average fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow, and will change as drivingconditions change.

The Average Speed display showsthe average speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value.

Press and hold V while this display

is active to reset the trip odometer,the average fuel economy, and the

average speed. Or press p and

select reset in the menu.

Fuel Range and InstantaneousFuel Economy : Shows theapproximate distance the vehicle



can be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. It also shows if theActive Fuel Management is activeand in V4 mode, or inactive and inV8 mode. See Active FuelManagement 0 211.

The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximate fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow and changes frequently asdriving conditions change.

Timer and Fuel Used : Can beused as a timer. To start the timer,press V while this display is active.

The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timerwas last reset. To stop the timer,

press V briefly while this display is

active and the timer is running. Toreset the timer to zero, press and

hold V while this display is active.

This also shows the number ofliters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel usedsince the last reset of thismenu item.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 289.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 379.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not to reset the OilLife display at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.

It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press andhold V for several seconds while

the Oil Life display is active. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 291.

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber. See Tire PressureMonitor System 0 335 andTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 336.

Best Fuel Economy : Displaysaverage fuel economy, the best fueleconomy over the selecteddistance, and a bar graph showinginstantaneous fuel economy.

Press p to change the selected

distance. Press and hold V while

this display is active to reset the



best fuel economy and average fueleconomy. This display can also bereset by selecting reset in the menu.

Top Consumers : Shows a list ofthe features that are currentlyimpacting the fuel economy, in orderfrom highest to lowest. If a feature isturned off, it will be removed fromthe list.

Economy Trend : Shows history ofthe Average Fuel Economy from thelast 50 km (30 mi). Each barrepresents about 5 km (3 mi) ofdriving. During driving the bars willshift to always reflect the mostrecent distance on the right side.Press and hold V to clear the graph

or press p to reset through

the menu.

ECO Index : Provides feedback onthe efficiency of current drivingbehavior. The bar graph shows avalue that is based on current fuelconsumption compared to what isexpected from the vehicle with goodand bad driving habits. It also showsif the Active Fuel Management is

active and in V4 mode, or inactiveand in V8 mode. See Active FuelManagement 0 211.

Engine Hours : Shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.This display also shows the engineidle hours.

Trailer Brake : Displays on vehicleswith the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting.

OUTPUT shows the power output tothe trailer any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT displayif a trailer is not connected.

Speed Signs : Shows signinformation, which comes from aroadway database in the onboardnavigation.

Off Road : Displays vehicle pitchand roll information, road wheelangle, and four-wheel drive (4WD)status.

Following Distance : Used toselect the alert timing for theForward Collision Alert (FCA). SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 245.

Blank Page : Shows noinformation.

Transmission Fluid TemperatureGauge : Shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning theoperation of the vehicle is projected



onto the windshield. The informationis projected through the HUD lenson the driver side of the instrumentpanel and focused out toward thefront of the vehicle.

Caution

If you try to use the HUD imageas a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed throughthe instrument cluster. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152 and "Options"under Instrument Cluster 0 126.

HUD Display on the Windshield

The HUD may display some of thefollowing vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts:

. Speed

. Tachometer

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Collision Alert

. Adaptive Cruise Control and setspeed

. Lane Departure Warning/LaneKeep Assist

. Low Fuel

Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may becleared by using the steering wheelcontrols. See Vehicle Messages0 151.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Use the following settings toadjust the HUD.

$ : Press or lift to center the HUDimage. The HUD image can only beadjusted up and down, not sideto side.



! : Press to select the displayview. Each press will change thedisplay view.

D : Lift and hold to brighten thedisplay. Press and hold to dim thedisplay. Continue to hold to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUDbrightness control can also beadjusted as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

Head-Up Display (HUD) RotationOption

This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image.

If equipped, this feature allows foradjusting the angle of the HUDimage. Press p on the steeringwheel controls while Head-up

Display Rotation is highlighted toenter Adjust Mode. Pressw orxto adjust the angle of the HUDdisplay. Press V to confirm andsave the setting. To cancel thesetting, press o. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park). See InstrumentCluster 0 126.

HUD Views

There are four views in the HUD.Some vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts may bedisplayed in any view.

Metric

English

Speed View : This displays digitalspeed in English or metric units,speed limit, vehicle ahead indicator,Lane Departure Warning/Lane KeepAssist, and Adaptive Cruise Controland set speed. Some informationonly appears on vehicles that havethese features, and when they areactive.

Metric



English

Audio/Phone View : This displaysdigital speed, indicators from speedview along with audio/phoneinformation. The current radiostation, media type, and incomingcalls will be displayed.

All HUD views may briefly displayaudio information when the steeringwheel controls are used to adjustthe audio settings appearing in theinstrument cluster.

Incoming phone calls may display inany HUD view.

Metric

English

Navigation View : This displaysdigital speed, indicators from speedview along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information in somevehicles. The compass heading isdisplayed when navigation routing isnot active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.

Metric

English

Performance View : This displaysdigital speed, indicators from speedview along with rpm reading,transmission positions, and gearshift indicator (if equipped).

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshieldas needed to remove any dirt or filmthat could reduce the sharpness orclarity of the HUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipethe lens gently, then dry it.



HUD Troubleshooting

If you cannot see the HUD imagewhen the ignition is on, check that:

. Nothing is covering theHUD lens.

. The HUD brightness setting isnot too dim or too bright.

. The HUD is adjusted to theproper height.

. Polarized sunglasses arenot worn.

. The windshield and HUD lensare clean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See WindshieldReplacement 0 310.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V. The messages thatrequire immediate action cannot becleared until that action isperformed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears,see your dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:

. Service Messages

. Fluid Levels

. Vehicle Security

. Brakes

. Steering

. Ride Control Systems

. Driver Assistance Systems

. Cruise Control

. Lighting and Bulb Replacement

. Wiper/Washer Systems

. Doors and Windows

. Seat Belts

. Airbag Systems

. Engine and Transmission

. Tire Pressure

. Battery

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power isreduced. A reduction in propulsionpower can affect the vehicle's abilityto accelerate. If this message is on,but there is no observed reductionin performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance may



be reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenwhile this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, or displaysrepeatedly, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Under certain operating conditions,propulsion will be disabled. Tryrestarting after the vehicle has beenoff for 30 seconds.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX KM/H (MPH)

This message shows that thevehicle speed has been limited tothe speed displayed. The limitedspeed is a protection for variouspropulsion and vehicle systems,such as lubrication, thermal, brakes,suspension, Teen Driver ifequipped, or tires.

VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Radio Audio System Controls

1. Touch the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

2. Select the desired featuresetting.

3. Press o BACK on the center

stack or touch S to return tothe previous menu or exit.

Turn the vehicle on to access theSettings menu, then selectSETTINGS from the Home Page onthe infotainment display.

Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Time and Date

. Rear Seat Reminder

. Language

. Video Voice-Over

. Valet Mode

. Teen Driver

. Radio

. Vehicle

. Bluetooth

. Apple CarPlay

. Android Auto

. Voice

. Display

. Rear Camera

. Return to Factory Settings

. Software Information

. Wi-Fi

Detailed information for each menufollows.



Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 119.

Rear Seat Reminder

This allows for a chime and amessage when the rear door hasbeen opened before or duringoperation of the vehicle.

Select Off or On.

Language

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

The selected language will displayon the system, and voicerecognition (if equipped) will reflectthe selected language.

Video Voice-Over

When activated, the Rear SeatInfotainment (RSI) system will readaloud menu titles, menu listings,pop-ups, alerts, and file titles fromaudio and video media.

Select Off or On.

Valet Mode

This will lock the infotainmentsystem and steering wheel controls.It may also limit access to vehiclestorage locations, if equipped.

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Select Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Touch Lock or Unlock to lock orunlock the system. Touch Back togo back to the previous menu.

Teen Driver

See “Teen Driver” under “Settings”in the infotainment manual.

Radio

Select and the following maydisplay:

. Manage Favorites

. Number of Favorites Shown

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Bose AudioPilot

. Auto Volume

. Maximum Startup Volume

. Audio Cue Volume

Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited.See “Manage Favorites” in“Settings” under “Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Shown

Select to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment systemwill automatically adjust the numberof favorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible TouchFeedback to be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Bose AudioPilot

This allows Bose AudioPilot to beturned on or off.



Select Off or On.

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volumebased on vehicle speed andambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.

Maximum Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level. To set themaximum startup volume, touch +or − to increase or decrease.

Audio Cue Volume

This feature sets the volume ofaudio files played at system startupand shutdown.

Select On, then touch + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Vehicle


. Climate and Air Quality

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Comfort and Convenience

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality


. Auto Fan Speed

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This feature will set the auto fanspeed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Defog

When set to On, the auto defogcomes on when the climate controlsensor detects high interiorhumidity. Air will be directed to thewindshield.

Select Off or On.

Auto Rear Defog

This feature will automatically turnon the rear window defogger whenthe vehicle is first started in coldweather and turn off when thevehicle is warmed.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems


. Alert Type

. Forward Collision System

. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

. Park Assist

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

. Lane Change Alert

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. Thissetting affects all crash alertsincluding Forward Collision Alert,Lane Departure Warning, and ParkAssist alerts.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.



Forward Collision System

This setting controls the vehicleresponse when detecting a vehicleahead of you. The Off settingdisables all FCA and AEB functions.With the Alert and Brake setting,both FCA and AEB are available.The Alert setting disables AEB. SeeAutomatic Emergency Braking(AEB) 0 248.

Select Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

This feature will give a reminder thatAdaptive Cruise Control provideswhen it has brought the vehicle to acomplete stop behind anotherstopping vehicle, and then thatvehicle drives on.

Select Off or On.

Park Assist

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Assistance Systemsfor Parking or Backing 0 242.

Select Off, On, or On with TowbarAttached.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Assistance Systemsfor Parking or Backing 0 242.

Select Off or On.

Lane Change Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Lane Change Alert(LCA) 0 250.

Select Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience


. Auto Power Assist Steps

. Auto Memory Recall

. Easy Exit Options

. Chime Volume

. Hands Free Liftgate Control

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Auto Mirror Folding

. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Auto Power Assist Steps

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Power Assist Steps0 32.

Select Off, On, or Extended.

Auto Memory Recall

This feature automatically recallsthe current driver’s previously stored1 or 2 button positions when theignition is changed from off to on orACC/ACCESSORY. See MemorySeats 0 51.

Select Off or On.

Easy Exit Options

This feature automatically recallsthe previously stored Exit buttonposition when exiting the vehicle.See Memory Seats 0 51.

Select Off or On.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Touch + or − to adjust the volume.



Hands Free Liftgate Control

The liftgate may be operated with akicking motion under the rearbumper. See Liftgate 0 27.

Select Off, On-Open and Close,or On-Open Only.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver and/orpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.See Reverse Tilt Mirrors 0 40.

Select Off, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver, or On -Passenger.

Auto Mirror Folding

When on, the outside mirrors willautomatically fold or unfold whenthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter Q or K button ispressed and held. See FoldingMirrors 0 38.

Select Off or On.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on and the front wiper is onand wiping, the rear wiper willautomatically activate when thevehicle is shifted to R (Reverse).

Select Off or On.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may display:

. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlamps and allows some of theexterior lamps and most of theinterior lamps to turn on briefly whenK on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter is pressed tolocate the vehicle.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may display:

. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open and the key is in theignition. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Select Off or On.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.



Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select Off or On.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start


. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If turned on, this feature will turn theventilated seats on when usingremote start on warm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If turned on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selectsfeedback. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

Select Off, On with HornChirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle. This menu also enablesRemote No Longer in Vehicle Alert.

Select Off or On.



Bluetooth


. Pair New Device

. Device Management

. Ringtones

. Voice Mail Numbers

. Text Message Alerts

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” in “Infotainment Controls”under “Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.

Ringtones

Select to change the ring tone forthe specific phone. The phone doesnot need to be connected to changethe ring tone.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones.To change the voice mail number,select EDIT. Type a new number,then select Save.

Text Message Alerts

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Off or On.

Apple CarPlay


. Apple CarPlay

. Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Apple CarPlay

This feature allows Apple devices tobe connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Select to manage Apple devices.Apple CarPlay must be on for thisfeature to be accessed.

Android Auto


. Android Auto

. Manage Android Auto Devices

Android Auto

This feature allows Android devicesto be connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Android Auto Devices

Select to manage Android devices.Android Auto must be on for thisfeature to be accessed.

Voice


. Confidence Threshold

. Prompt Length

. Audio Feedback Speed

. Display “What Can I Say?” Tips



Confidence Threshold

This feature allows the adjustmentof the sensitivity of the speechrecognition system.

Select Confirm More orConfirm Less.

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voiceprompt length.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display “What Can I Say?” Tips

This feature gives voicecommand tips.

Select Off or On.

Display


. Mode

. Calibrate Touchscreen

. Turn Display Off

Mode

Select to change the display of theinfotainment system.

Select Auto, Day, or Night.

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Touchanywhere on the infotainmentdisplay or press any infotainmentcontrols on the center stack to turnthe display on.

Rear Camera


. Guidance Lines

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

. Rear Park Assist Symbols

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 242.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Select to turn Off or On.

Rear Park Assist Symbols

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 242.

Return to Factory Settings


. Restore Vehicle Settings

. Clear All Private Data

. Restore Radio Settings



Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.

Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restoreradio settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view or update theinfotainment system currentsoftware information.

Wi-Fi


. Wi-Fi

. Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Wi-Fi

This feature allows Wi-Fi networksto be turned off or on.

Select Off or On.

Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Select to manage Wi-Fi networks.Wi-Fi must be on for this feature tobe accessed.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 405.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. These



instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quicker andmore accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515. For calls placedoutside the U.S.A, Canada,or Puerto Rico, international rateswill apply and may differ based onlandline or mobile phone.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1to 3 in) away from theUniversal Remote systembuttons with the indicator lightin view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of the garagedoor opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one ofthe three Universal Remotesystem buttons to be used tooperate the garage door. Donot release either button untilthe indicator light changes froma slow to a rapid flash. Thenrelease both buttons.

Some garage door openersmay require substitution ofStep 2 with the procedureunder “Radio Signals for SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage dooractivation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.


162 Instruments and Controls. If the indicator light does

not come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smartbutton inside the garage on thegarage door opener receiver.The name and color of thebutton may vary bymanufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote systembutton for three seconds andthen release it. If the garagedoor does not move or thelamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,

press and hold the samebutton a second time forthree seconds then release it.Again, if the door does notmove or the garage door lampdoes not flash, press and holdthe same button a third time forthree seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Some GateOperators

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515. For calls placedoutside the U.S.A, Canada,or Puerto Rico, international rateswill apply and may differ based onlandline or mobile phone.

Some radio-frequency laws andgate operators require transmittersignals to time out or quit afterseveral seconds of transmission.



This may not be long enough for theUniversal Remote system to pick upthe signal during programming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This shouldtake about 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”


164 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 164Exterior Lamps Off

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Automatic Headlamp

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 168Turn and Lane-Change

Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Interior LightingInstrument Panel Illumination

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Battery Load Management . . . 172Battery Power Protection . . . . . 172Exterior Lighting Battery

Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to O again to turn the

automatic headlamps or DRLback on.


Lighting 165

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped), andlicense plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps withthe parking lamps and instrumentpanel lights.

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before turning off toprevent the battery from beingdrained. Turn the headlamp controloff and then back to the headlampon position to make the headlampsstay on for an additional 10 minutes.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY.

IntelliBeam System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps onand off according to surroundingtraffic conditions.

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is darkenough and there is no other trafficpresent.

This light comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and EnablingIntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,activate the high/low-beam changeron then off within two seconds whilethe exterior lamp control is in AUTOor2.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

The blue high-beam on lightappears on the instrument clusterwhen the high beams are on.

There is a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield thatautomatically controls the system.Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

The high-beam headlamps remainon, under the automatic control,until one of the following situationsoccurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle'sheadlamps.


166 Lighting. The system detects a preceding

vehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is brightenough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The IntelliBeam system can bedisabled by the High/Low-BeamChanger or the Flash-to-Passfeature. If this happens, theHigh/Low-Beam Changer mustbe activated on then off withintwo seconds to reactivate theIntelliBeam system. Theinstrument cluster light will comeon to indicate the IntelliBeam isreactivated. See HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam Changer 0 166andFlash-to-Pass 0 167.

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect another vehicle's lampsbecause of any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructedfrom view, or otherwiseundetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to denseexhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist, or other airborneobstructions.

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the viewof the light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such thatthe front end points upward,causing the light sensor to aimhigh and not detect headlampsand taillamps.

. The vehicle is being driven onwinding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beamheadlamps may need to be disabledif any of the above conditions exist.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA reminder chime sounds when theheadlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on, the ignition isoff, and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the lamps off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush the turn signal lever towardthe instrument panel to change theheadlamps from low to high beam.

Pull the turn signal lever toward youand release it to return to low-beamheadlamps.

When the high-beam headlamps areon, this indicator light on theinstrument cluster will also be on.


Lighting 167

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. Depending on the type ofheadlamp, they will either turn offafter a short duration or stay on aslong as you hold the lever towardyou. The high-beam indicator on theinstrument cluster will come on.Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL are on. The taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then release.For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle isparked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor, otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.


168 Lighting

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If itis light outside when the vehicleleaves the garage, there is a slightdelay before the automaticheadlamp system changes to theDRL. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 170.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control to Oor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press this button to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.


Lighting 169

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flash threetimes. It will flash six times if Tow/Haul Mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more thanone second will cause the turnsignals to flash until the lever isreleased.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers 0 315.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal. The message TURNSIGNAL ON will also appear in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Toturn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Fog Lamps

If equipped with fog lamps, thebutton is on the exterior lampcontrol, to the left of the steeringcolumn.

The ignition must be on for the foglamps to come on.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps onor off. A light will come on in theinstrument cluster.

When the fog lamps are turned on,the parking lamps automaticallyturn on.


170 Lighting

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsare turned off, the fog lamps willcome on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights and isnext to the exterior lamp control.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.

Dome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.


Lighting 171

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be on or in ACC/ACCESSORYor using Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and the interiorlamps turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when Kis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. When adoor is opened, the interior lampscome on if the dome lamp control isin the DOOR position. After about30 seconds the exterior lamps turnoff. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlamps come on at night, or in areaswith limited lighting, when the driverdoor is opened after the ignition isturned off. The exterior lamps and


172 Lighting

interior lamps remain on for a setamount of time, then automaticallyturn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), whichestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. The voltmetergauge or the voltage display on theDriver Information Center (DIC),if equipped, may show the voltage

moving up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps if they are left on formore than 10 minutes when theignition is off. This will keep thebattery from running down.


Lighting 173

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned off, if the parking lamps orheadlamps have been manually lefton. This protects against drainingthe battery. To restart the 10-minutetimer, turn the exterior lamp controlto the O position and then back to

the; or2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY.


174 Infotainment System

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE),and voice or speech recognition,if equipped. It also includesinformation on settings.

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

If equipped, ANC reduces enginenoise in the vehicle’s interior. ANCrequires the factory-installed audiosystem, radio, speakers, amplifier(if equipped), induction system, andexhaust system to work properly.Deactivation is required by yourdealer if related aftermarketequipment is installed.


Climate Controls 175

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate

Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Rear Climate Control

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

MaintenancePassenger Compartment Air

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Climate ControlSystems

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemWith this system the heating,cooling, and ventilation in thevehicle can be controlled. Someclimate control settings can bechanged. See “Climate and AirQuality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger TemperatureControl

7. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

8. Rear Window Defogger

9. RCTRL (Rear Climate ControlLockout)

10. Rear Temperature Control

11. Rear Air Delivery Mode Control

12. Rear Fan Control

13. Front Climate Control PowerButton

14. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

15. Rear Climate Control PowerButton

16. Air Recirculation

17. AUTO (Automatic Operation)


176 Climate Controls

Front Climate Controls

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When AUTO is lit, all four functionsoperate automatically. Each functioncan also be manually set and thesetting is displayed. Functions notmanually set will continue to beautomatically controlled, even if theAUTO indicator is not lit.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting,start with 22 °C (72 °F) andallow the system time tostabilize. Then adjust thetemperature as needed for bestcomfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.

The recirculation light will not comeon when automatically controlled.Press@ to manually selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Do not cover the solar sensor on thetop of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulatesair temperature based on sun load.See “Sensors” later in this section.

Manual Operation

O : Press to turn the climate controlsystem on or off. When off isselected, the system will stop airfrom flowing into the cabin. If on isselected, a button is pressed, or aknob is turned, the climate controlsystem will turn on and operate atthe current setting.

9 : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

The maximum auto fan speed canbe adjusted. See “Climate and AirQuality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control : Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting.

SYNC : Press to link the passengerand rear climate temperaturesettings to the driver setting. TheSYNC indicator light will turn on.When the passenger or rear climatesettings are adjusted, the SYNCindicator light turns off.



Air Delivery Mode Control : PressY,\,[ , or- to change thedirection of the airflow. An indicatorlight comes on in the selected modebutton.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation of the mode.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Y : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ : Air is divided between theinstrument panel and floor outlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets, with some to the windshield,side window outlets, and secondrow floor outlets.

- : This mode clears the windowsof fog or moisture. Air is directed tothe windshield, floor outlets, andside window vents.

0 : Press to clear the windshieldof fog or frost more quickly. Air isdirected to the windshield and theside window vents. The systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle and the air conditioning

compressor will run, unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

See Air Vents 0 180.

A/C : Press to turn the airconditioning system on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the air conditioning is enabled.If the fan is turned off, the airconditioner will not run. The A/Clight will stay on even if the outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

@ : Press to turn on recirculation.An indicator light comes on. Air isrecirculated to quickly cool theinside of the vehicle. It can also beused to help reduce outside air andodors that enter the vehicle. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem uses a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust to

outside air supply, turn on the airconditioner, and direct more air tothe windshield. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization0 152.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

K : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is on. Thedefogger turns off if the ignition isturned off or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation. WhenAuto Rear Defog is selected, therear window defogger turns onautomatically when the vehicle isfirst started in cold weather andturns off when the vehicle is



warmed. To turn Auto Rear Defogon or off, see “Climate and AirQuality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Heated Mirror : If equipped withheated outside mirrors, the mirrorsheat to help clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirror when therear window defog button ispressed. See Heated Mirrors 0 39.

Rear Climate Controls

O : Press to turn the rear climatecontrol system on or off.

AUTO : Press AUTO to control therear passenger temperature, airdelivery, and fan speed. AUTOappears in the display when

automatic operation is active. If anyof the climate control settingsexcept rear temperature aremanually adjusted, this cancels fullautomatic operation.

Fan Control : Press up or down toincrease or decrease the rearpassenger area fan speed.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Pressup or down to change the directionof the rear passenger airflow.Repeatedly press the switch untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay. Multiple presses will cyclethrough the delivery selections.

Temperature Control : Press up ordown to increase or decrease theairflow temperature into the rearpassenger area.

RCTRL : Press to lock or unlockcontrol of the rear climate controlsystem from the rear seatpassengers. When locked, the rearclimate control can only be adjustedfrom the front seat.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

If equipped with the remote startfeature, the climate control systemwill come on when the vehicle isstarted remotely, depending on theoutside temperature. The rearwindow defogger and heated seats,if equipped, may also come on. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 23 andHeated and Ventilated Front Seats0 54.

Sensors

The solar sensor monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.



There is also an exteriortemperature sensor behind the frontgrille. This sensor reads the outsideair temperature and helps maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle.Any cover on the front of thevehicle, including a snowplow, couldcause a false reading in thedisplayed temperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and air delivery mode. Thesystem may also supply cooler air tothe side of the vehicle facing thesun. The recirculation mode will alsobe used as needed to maintain cooloutlet temperatures.

Rear Climate ControlSystemThe rear climate control system islocated on the rear of the centerconsole storage. The rear climatesettings can be adjusted with thissystem.

1. Fan Control

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

3. MODE (Air Delivery ModeControl)

4. TEMP (Temperature Control)

5. Heated Rear Seats (IfEquipped)

If the dual automatic climate controlsystem rear climate control lockoutfeature is locked, the rear climatecontrol settings can only beadjusted from the front seat.

Automatic Operation

AUTO : Press AUTO toautomatically control thetemperature, air delivery, and fanspeed for rear seat passengers. A isindicated in the display whenautomatic operation is active.

If any of the rear climate controlsettings are manually adjusted, fullautomatic operation is cancelled.Press AUTO to return to fullautomatic operation.

The display only indicates climatecontrol functions when the system isin rear independent mode.

Manual Operation

9 : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turncompletely counterclockwise to turnthe fan/power off.

TEMP : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the airflow temperatureinto the passenger area. If theSYNC button is pressed on the front



climate controls, the rear climatetemperature is linked to the drivertemperature setting.

MODE : Press to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press the button untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay. Multiple presses will cyclethrough the delivery selections.

M or L : If equipped, press M or Lto heat the left or right outboard seatcushion. See Heated Rear Seats0 55.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel.

1. Slider Knob

2. Thumbwheel

Move the slider knobs (1) to changethe direction of the airflow.

Use the thumbwheels (2) near theair vents to open or close off theairflow.

Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow,or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcould block the flow of air intothe vehicle.

. Clear snow off the hood toimprove visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn intothe vehicle.

. When you enter a vehicle in coldweather, press the fan up buttonto the maximum fan level beforedriving. This helps clear theintake ducts of snow andmoisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the inside ofthe window.

. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces the dust, pollen,and other airborne irritants fromoutside air that is pulled into thevehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule 0 379.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts 0 390.

1. Open the glove box completely.

2. Disconnect the glove box doordamper string from the glovebox door assembly. A pen orpencil may be inserted throughthe end of the damper string toprevent the string from slippinginside the door assembly.

3. Remove the six screws andremove the access plate.

4. Release the two tabs holdingthe service door. Open theservice door and remove theold filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door andsecure the tabs.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstallthe glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.



ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.

The air conditioning system requiresperiodic maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.


Driving and Operating 183

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriving for Better Fuel

Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 186Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 187Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 193Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 193Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 195Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 201Adjustable Throttle and Brake

Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Ignition Positions (Keyless

Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 206Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 210Parking over Things

That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Active Fuel Management . . . . . 211Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Running the Vehicle While

Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 213Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

BrakesAntilock Brake

System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 225

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/Electronic

Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . 228Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . 229Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Automatic Level Control . . . . . . 229

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . 232

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . 240Assistance Systems for

Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . 242Assistance Systems for

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Side Blind Zone

Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . 250Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . 251

FuelTop Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Recommended Fuel (L83 5.3L

V8 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254


184 Driving and Operating

Recommended Fuel (L86 6.2LV8 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 255Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Filling a Portable Fuel

Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Trailer TowingGeneral Towing

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Driving Characteristics and

Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 278

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Driving Information

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible:

. Set the climate controls to thedesired temperature after theengine is started, or turn themoff when not required.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keepyour eyes on the road, keep yourhands on the steering wheel, andfocus your attention on driving.


Driving and Operating 185. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment manual formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 62.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.



Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Caution

To avoid damage to the steeringsystem, do not drive over curbs,parking barriers, or similar objectsat speeds greater than 3 km/h(1 mph). Use care when drivingover other objects such as lanedividers and speed bumps.Damage caused by misuse of thevehicle is not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Electric Power Steering

This vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time while thevehicle is not moving, power assistmay be reduced.



If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.



Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout four-wheel drive andvehicles not equipped with AllTerrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)tires must not be driven off-roadexcept on a level, solid surface. Forcontact information about theoriginal equipment tires, see thewarranty manual.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear seat belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.

. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Remove any underbody airdeflector, if equipped. Re-attachthe air deflector after off-roaddriving.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.



To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lower airdam, if equipped. However, drivingwithout the air dam reduces fueleconomy.

Caution

Operating the vehicle forextended periods without the frontfascia lower air dam installed cancause improper airflow to theengine. Reattach the front fasciaair dam after off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or your

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers can be struckby flying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargoarea as far forward and aslow as possible. Theheaviest things should beon the floor, forward of therear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roofraise the vehicle's center ofgravity, making it more likelyto roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured ifthe vehicle rolls over. Putheavy loads inside thecargo area, not on the roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits0 196 andTires 0 326.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn 0 211.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills can

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

cause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:

. Use a low gear and keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approachingthe top of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause a crash. Therecould be a drop-off, embankment,cliff, or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two-speedautomatic or electronic transfercase, shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause yourvehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in P (Park). This isbecause the N (Neutral) position

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

on the transfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If leavingthe vehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park). Shift the transfer case toany position but N (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly when

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.

. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot berestarted after stalling, set theparking brake, shift intoP (Park), and turn thevehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on the

downhill wheels, which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.



{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud— the deeper the mud, the lowerthe gear. Keep the vehicle movingto avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive through it slowly. At fasterspeeds, water can get into theengine and cause it to stall. Stallingcan occur if the exhaust pipe isunder water. Do not turn off theignition when driving through water.If the exhaust pipe is under water,the engine will not start. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wetand it may take longer to stop. See“Driving on Wet Roads” later in thissection.



After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, driveline,steering, suspension, wheels, tires,and exhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. See the MaintenanceSchedule 0 379.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is

wet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 326.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:


194 Driving and Operating. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

loss of steering assist. Alwayshave the engine running and thevehicle in gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, crash).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) when

freezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 226.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) improves vehicle stabilityduring hard stops, but thebrakes should be applied soonerthan when on dry pavement.See Antilock Brake System(ABS) 0 224.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.


Driving and Operating 195. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 400. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and setthe fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 212.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 226.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing an

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

engine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Recovery Hooks

{ Warning

Never pull on recovery hooksfrom the side. The hooks couldbreak and you and others couldbe injured. When using recoveryhooks, always pull the vehiclefrom the front.

Caution

Never use recovery hooks to towthe vehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged, and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

There are recovery hooks at thefront of the vehicle. Use them if thevehicle is stuck off-road and needsto be pulled some place to continuedriving.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle 0 363.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called the



vehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipment

tires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires 0 326and Tire Pressure 0 333.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.



3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to

your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 264 forimportant information on towing atrailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs)

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =136 kg (750 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)



Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thecenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelmay shows the size of thevehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsomay show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, weigh the vehicle at aweigh station. Your dealer canhelp with this. Be sure to spreadyour load equally on both sidesof the centerline.

The Certification/Tire label mayalso include information aboutthe Front Axle ReserveCapacity.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

The label will help decide howmuch cargo and installedequipment the truck can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change theweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help load the vehicle theright way.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. When you carrysomething inside thevehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unless youneed to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving 0 188.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500 mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200 mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 264 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The pedals can only be adjustedwhen the vehicle is in P (Park).

The switch used to adjust thepedals is to the left of the steeringwheel.

Press the switch to the left to movethe pedals closer to your body.Press the switch to the right to movethe pedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats 0 51.



Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

Vehicles equipped with KeylessAccess have pushbutton starting.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be in the vehicle forthe system to operate. If thepushbutton start is not working, thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interferenceto the Keyless Access system. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 13 or

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be on or in service mode, andthe brake pedal must be applied.

Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (No Indicator Lights) : Whenthe vehicle is stopped, pressENGINE START/STOP once to turnthe engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 209.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willturn off.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

The vehicle may have an electricsteering column lock. The lock isactivated when the ignition is turnedoff and either front door is opened.A sound may be heard as the lockactuates or releases. The steeringcolumn lock may not release withthe wheels turned off center. If thishappens, the vehicle may not start.Move the steering wheel from left toright while attempting to start thevehicle. If this does not work, thevehicle needs service.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shifting



to N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition off. On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park)to turn the ignition off.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 225.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for longer than two seconds,or press twice in five seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light) : This mode allowssome electrical accessories to beused when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to off afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will turn the ignitionon. Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine 0 206.

Service Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Mode. Theinstruments and audio systems willoperate as they do when the ignitionis on, but the vehicle will not be ableto be driven. The engine will notstart in Service Mode. Press thebutton again to turn the ignition off.



Ignition Positions (KeyAccess)

0. Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF

1. ACC/ACCESSORY

2. ON/RUN

3. START

The ignition switch has fourpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.

0 (Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF) : This position turns off thevehicle. It also locks the ignition, thetransmission, and the steeringcolumn, if equipped with a lockingsteering column.

To turn off the vehicle:

1. Make sure that the vehicle isstopped.

2. Shift to P (Park).

3. Continue to hold the brakepedal, then set the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake0 225.

4. Push the key all the way in thesteering column (1), then turnthe key to LOCK/OFF (2).

5. Remove the key.

6. Release the brake pedal.

See your dealer if the key can beremoved in any other position.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 209.

A warning chime will sound whenthe driver door is opened and thekey is in the ignition.

If equipped with a locking steeringcolumn, the steering can bind withthe front wheels turned off center,which may prevent key rotation outof LOCK/OFF. If this happens, movethe steering wheel from right to leftwhile turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.



{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, turn off the vehicleonly in an emergency.

In an emergency, if the vehiclecannot be pulled over and must beturned off while driving:

1. Push the key all the way intoward the steering column,then turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

2. Brake using firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

3. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. Continuebraking and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

4. Come to a complete stop.

5. Shift to P (Park).

6. Push the key all the way intoward the steering column (1),then turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF (2).

7. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 225.

8. Remove the key.


Caution

Use the correct key, make sure itis all the way in — or pushed allthe way in toward the steeringcolumn when turning off thevehicle — and turn it only withyour hand.

1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : Thisposition allows features such as theinfotainment system to operatewhile the vehicle is off. It alsounlocks the steering column,if equipped with a locking steeringcolumn. Use this position if the

vehicle must be pushed or towed.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 209.

From ON/RUN, push the key all theway in toward the steering column,then turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

If the key is left in ACC/ACCESSORY with the engine off,the battery could drain and thevehicle may not start.

A warning chime will sound whenthe driver door is opened and thekey is in the ignition.

2 (ON/RUN) : This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition.



If the key is left in ON/RUN with theengine off, the battery could drainand the vehicle may not start. Thetransmission can be shifted in thisposition.

3 (START) : This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionreturns to ON/RUN for driving.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 280.

Starting Procedure (KeyAccess)

1. With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. Whenthe engine starts, let go of thekey. The idle speed will godown as the engine gets warm.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

When the low fuel warninglamp is on and the FUELLEVEL LOW message isdisplayed in the Driver

Information Center (DIC), holdthe ignition switch in theSTART position to continueengine cranking.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it therewhile holding the key in STARTfor up to 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motor



to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Starting Procedure (KeylessAccess)

1. With the Keyless Accesssystem, the RKE transmittermust be in the vehicle. PressENGINE START/STOP with thebrake pedal applied. When theengine begins cranking, let goof the button.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or if the RKE

battery is low, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) willdisplay a message.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by trying to startthe engine immediately aftercranking has ended, can overheatand damage the cranking motor,and drain the battery. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to let the cranking motorcool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou press ENGINE START/STOP, for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor to

cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the button, andthe accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race theengine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engineand transmission gently untilthe oil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Engine Heater

{ Warning

Do not plug in the engine blockheater while the vehicle is parkedin a garage or under a carport.Property damage or personalinjury may result. Always park thevehicle in a clear open area awayfrom buildings or structures.

If equipped, the engine heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditions



at or below −18 °C (0 °F). Vehicleswith an engine heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting. There may be an internalthermostat in the plug end of thecord, which will prevent engineheater operation at temperaturesabove −18 °C (0 °F).

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord is bythe left front fender, next to theengine compartment fuseblock.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detectionfunction. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could make

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

it overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to thevehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep it



away from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)When the ignition is turned from onto off, the following features (ifequipped) will continue to functionfor up to 10 minutes, or until thedriver door is opened. Thesefeatures will also work when theignition is in RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY:

. Infotainment System

. Power Windows (during RAPthis functionality will be lostwhen any door is opened)

. Sunroof (during RAP thisfunctionality will be lost whenany door is opened)

. Auxiliary Power Outlet

. Audio System

. OnStar System

Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If the vehicle has afour-wheel-drive transfer casewith an N (Neutral) position, andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear. If towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 259.

1. Hold the brake pedal down,then set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 225.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear – not inN (Neutral).

4. Push the ignition key in,towards the steering columnand then turn the ignition off.

5. Remove the key and take itwith you. If you can leave thevehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, the vehicle is inP (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenly

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

if the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear – not inN (Neutral).

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from

P (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave thedriver seat.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release system isdesigned to prevent movement ofthe shift lever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is on and the brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 360.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.



2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel ManagementVehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 144 formore information on using thisdisplay.

Extended ParkingIt is best not to park with the vehiclerunning. If the vehicle is left running,be sure it will not move and there isadequate ventilation.

See Shifting Into Park 0 209 andEngine Exhaust 0 212.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitteroutside the vehicle, it will continueto run for up to half an hour.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitterinside the vehicle, it will continue torun for up to an hour.

The vehicle could turn off sooner if itis parked on a hill, due to lack ofavailable fuel.

The timer will reset if the vehicle istaken out of P (Park) while it isrunning.



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 209 andEngine Exhaust 0 212.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 259.



AutomaticTransmissionThis vehicle has an electronic shiftlever position indicator within theinstrument cluster. This displaycomes on when the ignition is on orin service mode.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 216.

P : This position locks the drivewheels. Use P (Park) when startingthe engine because the vehiclecannot move easily. When parkedon a hill, especially when thevehicle has a heavy load, you mightnotice an increase in the effort to

shift out of P (Park). See “TorqueLock” under Shifting Into Park0 209.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 209 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 259.

{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll — evenif the shift lever is in P (Park) — ifthe transfer case is in N (Neutral).So, be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear, Two-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low — not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park0 209.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.



To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 195.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicleis already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

Caution

A transmission hot message maydisplay if the automatictransmission fluid is too hot.Driving under this condition candamage the vehicle. Stop and idlethe engine to cool the automatictransmission fluid. This messageclears when the transmission fluidhas cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normaldriving. If more power is needed forpassing, press the acceleratorpedal down.

Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Modewhen towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills,or driving off-road. Shift thetransmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control 0 187.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.



In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. The adaptive shiftcontrol process continuallycompares key shift parameters topre-programmed ideal shifts storedin the transmission’s computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

L : This position allows selection ofa range of gears appropriate forcurrent driving conditions.If equipped, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode 0 216.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicleis stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

This mode is enabled when thevehicle is started, but is not enabledin Range Selection Mode. It assistsin maintaining desired vehiclespeeds when driving on downhillgrades by using the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle.

The first time the system engagesfor each ignition cycle, a DICmessage will be displayed.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition cycle, press and hold theTow/Haul button for five seconds.When the button is released, therequested mode change is made.A DIC message displays.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode 0 218 andCruise Control 0 230.

Kickdown Mode

The accelerator pedal provides anadditional downshift after pressingthrough the kickdown feature.

It requires extra pedal pressure nearthe end of its travel to engage.



Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toL (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonson the shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions.

Hold the plus/minus buttons on theshift lever to select the highest orlowest range available for thecurrent vehicle speed.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), anumber displays next to the L,indicating the current transmissionrange.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in L (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number areavailable. As driving conditionschange, the transmission canautomatically shift to lower gears.For example, when 5 (Fifth) isselected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)gears are automatically shifted bythe transmission, but 6 (Sixth)cannot be used until the plus/minusbutton on the shift lever is used tochange to the range.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), adownshift may occur. The gear thatthe transmission is operating inwhen the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)determines if a downshift occurs.See the following chart.



6 Speed Transmission

Gear before shifting fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)

6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)

L4 L4 L3 L2 L2 L1

Low Traction Mode

Low Traction Mode assists invehicle acceleration when roadconditions are slippery, such as withice or snow. While the vehicle is at astop, select L2 using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels and help toprevent the tires from spinning.

10 Speed Transmission

Gear before shifting from D (Drive) toL (Manual Mode)

10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting from D (Drive) toL (Manual Mode) - Tow/Haul not engaged

L7 L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L2 L1

Range after shifting from D (Drive) toL (Manual Mode) - Tow/Haul engaged

L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L3 L2 L1



Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 218.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicleis stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.

Tow/Haul Mode

The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling. This providesincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and enhanced transmissionand engine cooling when drivingdown steep hills or mountaingrades, towing, or hauling heavyloads.

The selector button is on the end ofthe shift lever. Turn the Tow/HaulMode on and off by pressing thebutton. When the Tow/Haul Mode isenabled, a light on the instrumentcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 139 andHill and Mountain Roads 0 193.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment 0 270.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode 0 216.Tow/Haul Mode Grade Brakingassists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.



To disable or enable Tow/HaulGrade Braking within the currentignition cycle, press and hold theTow/Haul button for five seconds.When the button is released, therequested mode change is made.A DIC message is displayed.

See Towing Equipment 0 270.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 213andCruise Control 0 230.

Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel driveengages the front axle for extratraction.

Caution

Do not drive on clean, dry

pavement in 4 m and 4 n (ifequipped) for an extended periodof time. These conditions maycause premature wear on thevehicle’s powertrain.

Driving on clean, dry pavement in 4m or 4 n may:

. Cause a vibration to be felt inthe steering system.

. Cause tires to wear faster.

. Make the transfer case harder toshift, and cause it to run noisier.

{ Warning

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake0 225.

Caution

Extended high-speed operation in

4 n may damage or shorten thelife of the drivetrain.

Engagement noise and bump whenshifting between 4 n and 4 m or fromN (Neutral), with the engine running,is normal.



Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control off. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 226.

Two Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

If equipped, use the transfer caseknob next to the steering wheel toshift into and out of four-wheel drive.

All of the lights will blink on then offmomentarily when the ignitionturned on. The light that remains onwill indicate the state of thetransfer case.

If the indicator mark on the switchdoes not match up with the lightthen that likely means the switchwas moved when the ignitionwas off.

The indicator mark on the switchmust line up with the indicator lightbefore a shift can be commanded.To command a shift rotate thetransfer case switch to the newdesired position. The light will blinkmeaning that the shift is in progress.When the shift is completed the newposition will be illuminated. If thetransfer case cannot complete ashift command, it will go back to itslast chosen setting.

The settings are:

N (Neutral) : Use only when thevehicle needs to be towed. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 364orTowing the Vehicle 0 363.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable.When driving in AUTO, the frontaxle is engaged, and the vehicle'spower is sent to the front and rearwheels automatically based ondriving conditions. This settingprovides slightly lower fuel economythan 2 m.Do not use AUTO mode,if equipped, to park on a steepgrade with poor traction such as ice,snow, mud, or gravel. In AUTOmode only the rear wheels will holdthe vehicle from sliding whenparked. If parking on a steep grade,use 4 m to keep all four wheels

engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, whenoff-roading, or when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 n



when driving off-road in deep sand,deep mud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction

Control and StabiliTrak/ESC off.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 226.

Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition at any speed, except from 4n. The indicator light will flash whileshifting and will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,

except when shifting from 4 n. Theindicator light will flash while shiftingand will remain on when the shift iscompleted.

Shifting Into 4 n

When 4 n is engaged, keep vehiclespeed below 72 km/h (45 mph).

To shift:

1. The ignition must be on andthe vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral). It isbest for the vehicle to bemoving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for

the 4 n indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 n indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift. After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob

to 4 m to display the indicator. Withthe vehicle moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph), and the transmission inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.

Shifting Out of 4 nTo shift:

1. The vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmissionin N (Neutral) and the ignitionon. It is best for the vehicle tobe moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO,

or 2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO,

or 2 m indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.



If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator lightwill flash for 30 seconds but will notcomplete the shift. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph),and the transmission in N (Neutral),attempt the shift again.

Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift into N (Neutral):

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface.

2. Set the parking brake andpress and hold the brakepedal. See Parking Brake0 225.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition on.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.6. Turn the transfer case knob

clockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least

10 seconds. Then slowlyrelease the knob to the 4 nposition. The N (Neutral) lightwill come on when the transfercase shift to N (Neutral) iscomplete.

7. With the engine running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse),then shift the transmission toD (Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting the transmission.

8. Turn the engine off, and theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park). SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing0 364.


Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift out of N (Neutral):

1. Set the parking brake andapply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition on with theengine off.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn the transfer case knob tothe desired setting.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to thedesired gear.



Single Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Use the transfer case knob, next tothe steering wheel, to shift into andout of four-wheel drive for extratraction.

All of the lights will blink on then offmomentarily when the ignition isturned on. The light that remains onwill indicate the state of thetransfer case.

If the indicator mark on the switchdoes not match up with the lightthen that likely means the switchwas moved when the ignitionwas off.

The indicator mark on the switchmust line up with the indicator lightbefore a shift can be commanded.To command a shift rotate thetransfer case switch to the newdesired position. The light will blinkmeaning that the shift is in progress.When the shift is completed the newposition will be illuminated. If thetransfer case can not complete ashift command, it will go back to itslast chosen setting.

The settings are:

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable.When driving in AUTO, the frontaxle is engaged, and the vehicle'spower is sent to the front and rearwheels automatically based ondriving conditions. This settingprovides slightly lower fuel economythan 2 m.Do not use AUTO mode to park ona steep grade with poor tractionsuch as ice, snow, mud, or gravel.In AUTO mode only rear wheels willhold the vehicle from sliding whenparked. If parking on a steep grade,use 4 m to keep all four wheels

engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, whenoff-roading, or when plowing snow.



Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition. This can be done at anyspeed. The indicator light will flashwhile shifting. It will remain on whenthe shift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to the 2 m position.This can be done at any speed. Theindicator light will flash whileshifting. It will remain on when theshift is completed.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)The Antilock Brake System (ABS)helps prevent a braking skid andmaintain steering whilebraking hard.

ABS performs a system check whenthe vehicle is first driven.A momentary motor or clicking noisemay be heard while this test is goingon, and the brake pedal may moveslightly. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 138.

ABS does not change the timeneeded to get a foot on the brakepedal and does not alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If youget too close to the vehicle ahead,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room ahead to stop,even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly.Hearing or feeling ABS operate isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows steering and braking atthe same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpeven more than braking.



Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light0 138.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, a DICmessage will appear and a chimewill sound warning you that theparking brake is still on.

Brake AssistBrake Assist detects rapid brakepedal applications due toemergency braking situations andprovides additional braking toactivate the Antilock Brake System

(ABS) if the brake pedal is notpushed hard enough to activateABS normally. Minor noise, brakepedal pulsation, and/or pedalmovement during this time mayoccur. Continue to apply the brakepedal as the driving situationdictates. Brake Assist disengageswhen the brake pedal is released.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

{ Warning

Do not rely on the HSA feature.HSA does not replace the need topay attention and drive safely.You may not hear or feel alerts orwarnings provided by this system.Failure to use proper care whendriving may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. SeeDefensive Driving 0 185.

When the vehicle is stopped on agrade, Hill Start Assist (HSA)temporarily prevents the vehiclefrom rolling in an unintendeddirection during the transition from



brake pedal release to acceleratorpedal apply. The brakes releasewhen the accelerator pedal isapplied or automatically releaseafter a few seconds. The brakesmay also release under otherconditions. Do not rely on HSA tohold the vehicle.

HSA is available when the vehicle isfacing uphill in a forward gear,or when facing downhill inR (Reverse). The vehicle mustcome to a complete stop on a gradefor HSA to activate.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of thevehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on the

intended path. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) 0 278.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 195and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.



When the transfer case is inFour-Wheel Drive Low, the stabilitysystem is automatically disabled, gcomes on, and the appropriatemessage will appear on the DIC.Both traction control and StabiliTrakare automatically disabled in thiscondition.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on to

indicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the instrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The traction off light idisplays in the instrument cluster.The appropriate message willdisplay in the DIC. To turn TCS onagain, press and release g. The

traction off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turnoff until the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold g until the traction

off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF

light g come on and stay on in the



instrument cluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release g. The

traction off light i and the

StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature and a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature. SeeTrailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 278 orHill Start Assist (HSA) 0 225.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 283.

Hill DescentControl (HDC)If equipped, Hill Descent Control(HDC) sets and maintains vehiclespeed while driving down steepgrades in a forward or reverse gear.The HDC switch is on the centerstack, below the climate controls.

Press 5 to enable or disable HDC.Vehicle speed must be below50 km/h (31 mph).

When enabled, the HDC lightdisplays on the instrument cluster.

A blinking HDC light indicates thesystem is actively applying thebrakes to maintain vehicle speed.HDC can maintain vehicle speedsbetween 1 and 30 km/h (1 and19 mph) on grades greater than orequal to 10%.

If HDC is to be used for more thanthree minutes or on grades steeperthan 25%, the transfer case shouldbe put into Four-Wheel Drive Low (4n) to reduce the possibility of brakeoverheating.

Noise from the hydraulic brakecontrol module is normal when HDCis active.

When HDC is activated, the initialHDC speed is set to the currentdriving speed. It can be increased ordecreased by pressing +RES orSET- on the steering wheel, or byapplying the accelerator or brakepedal. This adjusted speedbecomes the new set speed.

HDC will remain enabled between30 and 60 km/h (19 and 37 mph);however, vehicle speed cannot beset or maintained in this range. HDCwill automatically disable if thevehicle speed is above 80 km/h(50 mph) or above 60 km/h(37 mph) for at least 30 seconds.

5 must be pressed again tore-enable HDC. HDC may disableafter an extended period of use.



If this happens, HDC will requiretime to cool down. The length oftime HDC remains active dependson road conditions, grade, setspeed, vehicle loading, and outsidetemperature.

When enabled, if the vehicle speedis above 30 km/h (19 mph) andbelow 60 km/h (37 mph), a DICmessage will display.

Magnetic Ride ControlIf equipped, this vehicle may have asemi-active damping system calledMagnetic Ride Control. With thisfeature, improved vehicle ride andhandling is provided under a varietyof passenger and loadingconditions.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Automatic Level ControlThe Automatic Level Control (ALC)rear suspension is available onlight-duty vehicles and comes as apart of the Magnetic Ride Controlsuspension, if equipped. ALC mayalso be available as a stand alonefeature.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.An air compressor connected to therear shocks will raise or lower therear of the vehicle to maintainproper vehicle height. The system isactivated when the ignition key isturned on and will automaticallyadjust vehicle height thereafter. Thesystem may exhaust (lower vehicleheight) for up to 10 minutes after theignition key has been turned off.You may hear the air compressoroperating when the height is beingadjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is beingused, it is recommended to allowthe shocks to inflate, therebyleveling the vehicle prior to adjustingthe hitch.



Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more can bemaintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol disengages.

For an explanation of how cruisecontrol interacts with the RangeSelection Mode, Tow/Haul Mode,

and Grade Braking systems. See“Grade Braking” underTow/HaulMode 0 218.

This vehicle has StabiliTrak andwhen the system begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 226. If a collision alertoccurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System 0 245. Whenroad conditions allow the cruisecontrol to be safely used again, itcan be turned back on.

5 : Press to turn the system on oroff. A white indicator comes on inthe instrument cluster when thecruise is turned on.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press to resume thatspeed or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If5 is on when not in use, SET− or+RES could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise5 button off when cruise isnot being used.

1. Press5 to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.



3. Press and release SET−. Thedesired set speed brieflyappears in the instrumentcluster.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 126.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesor* is applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,briefly press +RES. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold +RES until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 126.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, briefly press SET–.For each press, the vehicle goesabout 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing SET– will result in cruisecontrol set to the current vehiclespeed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedal



may be necessary to maintainvehicle speed. When goingdownhill, Cruise Grade Brakinghelps maintain the driver selectedspeed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It is notenabled in Range Selection Mode.It assists in maintaining driverselected speed when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable and enable Cruise GradeBraking for the current ignition keycycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for five seconds. A DICmessage displays.

For other forms of Grade Braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 213andTow/Haul Mode 0 218.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press5.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 5 is pressedor if the ignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf equipped with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows for selectingthe cruise control set speed andfollowing gap. Read this entiresection before using this system.ACC uses a camera and radarsensors to detect other vehicles.See Radio Frequency Statement0 405. The following gap is thefollowing time (or distance) betweenyour vehicle and a vehicle detecteddirectly ahead in your path, movingin the same direction. If no vehicleis detected in your path, ACC workslike regular cruise control.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can speed up the vehicle orapply limited, moderate braking tomaintain the selected following gap.To disengage ACC, apply the brake.If the Traction Control System (TCS)or electronic stability control systemactivates while ACC is engaged,ACC may automatically disengage.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 226. When roadconditions allow ACC to be safelyused, the ACC can be turnedback on.

ACC will not engage if the TCS orelectronic stability control system isdisabled.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking abilityand may not have time to slowthe vehicle down enough to avoida collision with another vehicleyou are following. This can occurwhen vehicles suddenly slow orstop ahead, or enter your lane.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Also see “Alerting the Driver” inthis section. Complete attention isalways required while driving andyou should be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 185.

{ Warning

ACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roadsor when the sensors areblocked by snow, ice, or dirt.The system may not detecta vehicle ahead. Keep theentire front of the vehicleclean.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Visibility is low, such as infog, rain, or snowconditions. ACCperformance is limited underthese conditions.

. On slippery roads wherefast changes in tire tractioncan cause excessivewheel slip.

5 : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator turns white on theinstrument cluster when ACC isturned on.

+RES : Press briefly to resume theprevious set speed or hold toaccelerate. If ACC is alreadyengaged, use to increase vehiclespeed.

SET– : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate ACC. If cruisecontrol is already engaged, use todecrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage ACCwithout erasing the selected setspeed.

3 : Press to select a following gaptime (or distance) setting for ACC ofFar, Medium, or Near.




Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control

If equipped, to switch between ACCand regular cruise control, pressand hold*. A Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message displays.See Vehicle Messages 0 151.

ACC Indicator Regular CruiseControl Indicator

When ACC is engaged, a green\ indicator will be lit on theinstrument cluster and the followinggap will be displayed. When theregular cruise control is engaged, agreen J indicator will be lit on theinstrument cluster; the following gapwill not display.

When the vehicle is turned on, thecruise control mode will be set tothe last mode used before thevehicle was turned off.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, it couldget pressed and go into ACC whennot desired. Keep J off whencruise is not being used.

Select the set speed desired forcruise. This is the vehicle speedwhen no vehicle is detected inits path.

ACC will not set or resume at aspeed less than 25 km/h (16 mph).

To set ACC:

1. Press5.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET– .

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle aheadis detected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

ACC can also be set while thevehicle is stopped if ACC is on andthe brake pedal is applied.

The ACC indicator displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) inthe instrument cluster and Head-Updisplay (HUD), if equipped. WhenACC is active, the indicator turnsgreen.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selectingthe set speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the ACC is set at a desired speedand then the brakes are applied,ACC is disengaged without erasingthe set speed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, press+RES on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previous setspeed.



Increasing Speed While ACC is ata Set Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET– .Release the control and theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the higherspeed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden. TheACC indicator will turn blue onthe instrument panel and headsup display, if equipped.

. Press and hold +RES until thedesired set speed appears onthe display, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, thevehicle goes to the next 1 km/h(1 mph) faster mark on thespeedometer.

. To increase speed in largerincrements, press and brieflyhold +RES. For each press, the

vehicle speed goes to next5 km/h (5 mph) faster mark onthe speedometer.

When it is determined that there isno vehicle ahead or the vehicleahead is beyond the selectedfollowing gap, then the vehiclespeed will increase to the set speed.

The set speed can also beincreased while the vehicle isstopped.

. If stopped with the brakeapplied, press RES+ until thedesired set speed is displayed.

. Pressing RES+ when there is nolonger a vehicle ahead or thevehicle ahead is pulling awayand the brake is not applied willcause the ACC to resume.

Reducing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the brake to get to thedesired lower speed. Releasethe brake and press SET– . Thevehicle will now cruise at thelower speed.

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressSET−. For each press, thevehicle speed goes to the next1 km/h (1 mph) slower mark onthe speedometer.

. To decrease speed in largerincrements, press and brieflyhold SET−. For each press, thevehicle speed goes to the next5 km/h (5 mph) slower mark onthe speedometer.

The set speed can also bedecreased while the vehicle isstopped.

. If stopped with the brakeapplied, press or hold SET− untilthe desired set speed isdisplayed.

Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust the



vehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press3 on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Whenpressed, the current gap settingdisplays briefly on the instrumentcluster and HUD, if equipped.Subsequent presses cycle the3button through three settings: Far,Medium, or Near. The gap settingwill be maintained until it ischanged.

Since each gap setting correspondsto a following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow avehicle detected ahead. Considertraffic and weather conditions whenselecting the following gap. Therange of selectable gaps may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alerttiming sensitivity (Far, Medium,

or Near) for the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) feature. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 245.

Alerting the Driver

Without Head-Up Display

With Head-Up Display

If ACC is engaged, driver actionmay be required when ACC cannotapply sufficient braking because ofapproaching a vehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, six redlights or the collision alert symbol onthe HUD, if equipped, will flash onthe windshield, and either eightbeeps will sound from the front,

or both sides of the Safety AlertSeat will pulse five times. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.

See Defensive Driving 0 185.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead indicator is in theinstrument cluster and HUD,if equipped.

The vehicle ahead indicator onlydisplays when a vehicle is detectedin your vehicle’s path moving in thesame direction.

If this indicator is not displaying,ACC will not respond to or brake tovehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at the



selected follow gap. The vehiclespeed increases or decreases tofollow the vehicle in front of you, butwill not exceed the set speed. It mayapply limited braking, if necessary.When braking is active, the brakelights will come on. The automaticbraking may feel or sound differentthan if the brakes were appliedmanually. This is normal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

ACC may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for avehicle it has never detectedmoving. This can occur instop-and-go traffic or when avehicle suddenly appears due toa vehicle ahead changing lanes.Your vehicle may not stop andcould cause a crash. Use cautionwhen using ACC. Your complete

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

attention is always required whiledriving and you should be readyto take action and apply thebrakes.

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengageand you will need to manually applythe brakes to slow the vehicle if:

. Your vehicle speed goes belowthe minimum speed of 16 km/h(10 mph).

. The sensors are blocked.

. The Traction Control System(TCS) or electronic stabilitycontrol system has activated orbeen disabled.

. There is a fault in the system.

. The radar falsely reports ablockage when driving in adesert or remote area with noother vehicles or roadside

objects. A DIC message maydisplay to indicate that ACC istemporarily unavailable.

A message will appear on the DICindicating that cruise is disengaging.

The ACC indicator will turn whitewhen ACC is no longer active.

Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a following gapbehind a detected vehicle and slowyour vehicle to a stop behind thedetected vehicle.

If the stopped vehicle ahead hasdriven away and ACC has notresumed, the vehicle aheadindicator will flash as a reminder tocheck traffic ahead beforeproceeding. In addition, the left andright sides of the Safety Alert Seatwill pulse three times, or threebeeps will sound. See ”Alert Type”and “Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.



When the vehicle ahead drivesaway, press +RES or theaccelerator pedal to resume cruisecontrol.

A DIC warning message maydisplay indicating to shift to P (Park)before exiting the vehicle. SeeVehicle Messages 0 151.

{ Warning

If ACC has stopped the vehicle,and if ACC is disengaged, turnedoff, or canceled, the vehicle willno longer be held at a stop. Thevehicle can move. When ACC isholding the vehicle at a stop,always be prepared to manuallyapply the brakes.

{ Warning

Leaving the vehicle withoutplacing it in P (Park) can bedangerous. Do not leave thevehicle while it is being held at a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

stop by ACC. Always place thevehicle in P (Park) and turn offthe ignition before leaving thevehicle.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, the ACC indicatorturns blue on the instrument clusterand in the HUD (if equipped) toindicate that automatic braking willnot occur. ACC will resumeoperation when the acceleratorpedal is not being pressed.

{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following avehicle exiting or entering exitramps. You could lose control ofthe vehicle or crash. Do not useACC while driving on an entranceor exit ramp. Always be ready touse the brakes if necessary.

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may respond toa vehicle in another lane, or maynot have time to react to a vehiclein your lane. You could crash intoa vehicle ahead of you, or losecontrol of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be ready

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

to use the brakes if necessary.Select an appropriate speed whiledriving in curves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce thevehicle speed if the curve is toosharp.

When following a vehicle andentering a curve, ACC may notdetect the vehicle ahead andaccelerate to the set speed. Whenthis happens, the vehicle aheadindicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that isnot in your lane and apply thebrakes.

ACC may occasionally provide analert and/or braking that isconsidered unnecessary. It couldrespond to vehicles in differentlanes, signs, guardrails, and otherstationary objects when entering orexiting a curve. This is normaloperation. The vehicle does notneed service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.

Do Not Use ACC on Hills andWhen Towing a Trailer



Do not use ACC when driving onsteep hills or when towing a trailer.ACC will not detect a vehicle in thelane while driving on steep hills. Thedriver will often need to take overacceleration and braking on steephills, especially when towing atrailer. If the brakes are applied, theACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Press5.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 5 is pressedor if the ignition is turned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The radar sensor on the front of thevehicle can become blocked bysnow, ice, dirt, or mud. This areaneeds to be cleaned for ACC tooperate properly.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care 0 367.

System operation may also belimited under snow, heavy rain,or road spray conditions.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or feelalerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Driving0 185.

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitoredby the system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide youwith enough time to avoid acrash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

. Work if the detection sensoris covered up, such as witha sticker, magnet, or metalplate.

. Work if the area surroundingthe detection sensor isdamaged or not properlyrepaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see “Comfortand Convenience” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

If equipped with the Safety AlertSeat, the driver seat cushion mayprovide a vibrating pulse alertinstead of beeping. To change this,see “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization0 152.

Cleaning

Depending on vehicle options, keepthese areas of the vehicle clean toensure the best driver assistancefeature performance. Driver

Information Center (DIC) messagesmay display when the systems areunavailable or blocked.


242 Driving and Operating. Front and rear bumpers and the

area below the bumpers

. Front grille and headlamps

. Front camera lens in the frontgrille or near the front emblem

. Front side and rear side panels

. Outside of the windshield in frontof the rearview mirror

. Side camera lens on the bottomof the outside mirrors

. Rear side corner bumpers

. Rear Vision Camera above thelicense plate

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Park Assist (RPA),Front Park Assist (FPA), SurroundVision, Front Vision Camera, andRear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) mayhelp the driver park or avoid objects.Always check around the vehiclewhen parking or backing.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the infotainment display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press anybutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of approximately 12 km/h (8mph). The rear vision camera isabove the license plate.

1. View Displayed by theCamera

1. View Displayed by theCamera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display toshow that RPA has detected anobject. This triangle changes fromamber to red and increases in sizethe closer the object.

Surround Vision

If equipped, Surround Visiondisplays an image of the areasurrounding the vehicle, along withthe front or rear camera views in the



infotainment display. The frontcamera is in the grille or near thefront emblem, the side cameras areon the bottom of the outsiderearview mirrors, and the rearcamera is above the license plate.

{ Warning

The Surround Vision camerashave blind spots and will notdisplay all objects near thecorners of the vehicle. Foldingoutside mirrors that are out ofposition may not display surroundview correctly. Always checkaround the vehicle when parkingor backing.

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area infront of the vehicle shows in theinfotainment display. The viewdisplays after shifting fromR (Reverse) to a forward gear, or bytouching CAMERA on theinfotainment display, and when thevehicle is moving forward slowerthan 8 km/h (5 mph). If equipped,the front view camera also displayswhen the Park Assist systemdetects an object within30 cm (12 in).



{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

Park Assist

With RPA, and if equipped with FPA,as the vehicle moves at speeds ofless than 8 km/h (5 mph) thesensors on the bumpers may detectobjects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind and1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehiclewithin a zone 25 cm (10 in) high offthe ground and below bumper level.These detection distances may beshorter during warmer or humid

weather. Blocked sensors will notdetect objects and can also causefalse detections. Keep the sensorsclean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, andslush; and clean sensors after a carwash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The Park Assist system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withPark Assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.

The instrument cluster may have apark assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for RPA, and onsome vehicles, FPA. As the objectgets closer, more bars light up andthe bars change color from yellow toamber to red.

When an object is first detected inthe rear, one beep will be heardfrom the rear, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse twotimes. When an object is very close(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),a continuous beep will sound fromthe front or rear depending on



object location, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse fivetimes. Beeps for FPA are higherpitched than for RPA.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), RCTAdisplays a red warning triangle witha left or right pointing arrow to warnof traffic coming from the left orright. This system detects objectscoming from up to 20 m (65 ft) fromthe left or right side of the vehicle.When an object is detected, eitherthree beeps sound from the left orright or three Safety Alert Seatpulses occur on the left or right side,depending on the direction of thedetected vehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of the vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.

Turning the Features On or Off

TheX button to the left of thesteering wheel is used to turn on oroff the Front and Rear Park Assist.The indicator light in the buttoncomes on when the features are onand turns off when the featureshave been disabled.

Front and Rear Park Assist can beset to Off, On, or On with Towbarthrough vehicle personalization. See“Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152. If Park Assistis turned off through vehiclepersonalization, the Park Assistbutton will be disabled. To turn thePark Assist on again, select On invehicle personalization. The On withTowbar setting allows for ParkAssist to work properly with anattached trailer hitch. Turn off ParkAssist when towing a trailer.

To turn the RPA symbols, guidancelines, or Rear Cross Traffic Alert onor off, see “Rear Camera” and“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152. On

some models, select the guidancelines button on the infotainmentdisplay to turn them on or off.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle in a forward gear, ForwardCollision Alert (FCA), LaneDeparture Warning (LDW), LaneKeep Assist (LKA), Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert(LCA), and/or Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB) can help to avoid acrash or reduce crash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.FCA also lights an amber visualalert if following another vehiclemuch too closely.



FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 8 km/h (5 mph). If the vehiclehas Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),it can detect vehicles to distances ofapproximately 110 m (360 ft) andoperates at all speeds. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control 0 232.

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, guardrails,bridges, construction barrels,or other objects. Be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 185.

FCA can be disabled with either theFCA steering wheel control or,if equipped, through vehiclepersonalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected,the vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay green. Vehicles may not bedetected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, due to poor visibility;or if a vehicle ahead is partiallyblocked by pedestrians or otherobjects. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

With Head-Up Display



Without Head-Up Display

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.When this Collision Alert occurs, thebrake system may prepare for driverbraking to occur more rapidly whichcan cause a brief, mild deceleration.Continue to apply the brake pedalas needed. Cruise control may bedisengaged when the Collision Alertoccurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle-ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ /3 toset the FCA timing to Far, Medium,Near, or on some vehicles, Off. Thefirst button press shows the currentsetting on the DIC. Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it ischanged and will affect the timing ofboth the Collision Alert and theTailgating Alert features. The timingof both alerts will vary based onvehicle speed. The faster thevehicle speed, the farther away thealert will occur. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selecting

the alert timing. The range ofselectable alert timing may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the ACCfollowing gap setting (Far, Medium,or Near).

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, this may correctthe issue:

. Clean the outside of thewindshield in front of therearview mirror.

. Clean the entire front of thevehicle.


248 Driving and Operating. Clean the headlamps.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care 0 367.

System operation may also belimited under snow, heavy rain,or road spray conditions.

Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has AEB, whichincludes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA). When the systemdetects a vehicle ahead in your paththat is traveling in the samedirection that you may be about tocrash into, it can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake thevehicle. This can help avoid orlessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear. Dependingon the situation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This automatic emergencybraking can only occur if a vehicle isdetected. This is shown by the FCA

vehicle ahead indicator being lit.See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 245.

The system works when driving in aforward gear between 8 km/h(5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph),or on vehicles with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), above 4 km/h(2 mph). It can detect vehicles up toapproximately 60 m (197 ft).

{ Warning

AEB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Donot rely on AEB to brake thevehicle. AEB will not brakeoutside of its operating speedrange and only responds todetected vehicles.

AEB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect all vehicles,especially vehicles with atrailer, tractors, muddyvehicles, etc.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow.

. Detect a vehicle ahead if itis partially blocked bypedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

AEB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. The vehicle will onlyhold at a stop briefly. A firm press ofthe accelerator pedal will alsorelease AEB.



{ Warning

AEB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected andundesired. It could respond to aturning vehicle ahead, guardrails,signs, and other non-movingobjects. To override AEB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providinga boost to braking based on thespeed of approach and distance toa vehicle ahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the brake pedal shouldcontinue to be applied as needed.IBA will automatically disengageonly when the brake pedal isreleased.

{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle brakingin situations when it may not benecessary. You could block theflow of traffic. If this occurs, takeyour foot off the brake pedal andthen apply the brakes as needed.

AEB and IBA can be disabledthrough vehicle personalization. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.

{ Warning

Using AEB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Alert, or if thevehicle has ACC to Off, whentowing a trailer.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if:

. The front of the vehicle orwindshield is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith object detection.

. There is a problem with theStabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system.

The AEB system does not needservice.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas.When the vehicle is in a forwardgear, the left or right side mirrordisplay will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in that blindzone. If the turn signal is activatedand a vehicle is also detected onthe same side, the display will flashas an extra warning not to changelanes. Since this system is part ofthe Lane Change Alert (LCA)system, read the entire LCA sectionbefore using this feature.



Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding lane changecrashes that occur with movingvehicles in the side blind zone (orspot) areas or with vehicles rapidlyapproaching these areas frombehind. The LCA warning displaywill light up in the correspondingoutside mirror and will flash if theturn signal is on.

{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changinglanes under all driving conditions.Failure to use proper care whenchanging lanes may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Before making a lane change,always check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

LCA Detection Zones

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. TheSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)warning area starts at approximatelythe middle of the vehicle and goesback 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are alsowarned of vehicles rapidlyapproaching from up to 70 m (230 ft)behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in theoutside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blindzone or rapidly approaching thatzone from behind. A lit LCA symbolindicates it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the LCA display,check mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.

Left OutsideMirror Display

Right OutsideMirror Display

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the leftor right outside mirror display willlight up if a moving vehicle isdetected in the next lane over in that



blind zone or rapidly approachingthat zone. If the turn signal isactivated in the same direction as adetected vehicle, this display willflash as an extra warning not tochange lanes.

LCA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. When youdisable LCA, Side Blind Zone Alertis also disabled. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152. If LCA isdisabled by the driver, the LCAmirror displays will not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires somedriving for the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic androadside objects (e.g., guardrails,barriers).

LCA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly, fora stopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zones

that extend back from the side ofthe vehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extendingout to either side of the vehicle.Attached objects may also interferewith the detection of vehicles. Thisis normal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not always alert the driverto vehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The systemdoes not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due toguardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, andother non-moving objects. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care 0 367.

If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaningboth sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen moving vehicles are in theside blind zone or are rapidlyapproaching this zone and thesystem is clean, the system mayneed service. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.

Radio Frequency Information

See Radio Frequency Statement0 405.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. This system uses acamera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph). It may assist bygently turning the steering wheel ifthe vehicle approaches a detectedlane marking. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW)alert if the vehicle crosses a



detected lane marking. LKA can beoverridden by turning the steeringwheel. This system is not intendedto keep the vehicle centered in thelane. LKA will not assist and alert ifthe turn signal is active in thedirection of lane departure, or if itdetects that you are accelerating,braking or actively steering.

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if alane marking is detected.

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid alane departure or crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

headlamps are blocked bydirt, snow, or ice; if they arenot in proper condition; or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it willonly assist or provide an LDWalert when approaching the laneon the side where it has detecteda lane marking. Even with LKAand LDW, you must steer thevehicle. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

bad weather conditions or onroads with unclear lane markings,such as construction zones.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a traileror on slippery roads could causeloss of control of the vehicle anda crash. Turn the system off.

How the System Works

LKA uses a camera sensor installedon the windshield ahead of therearview mirror to detect lanemarkings. It may provide briefsteering assist if it detects anunintended lane departure. It mayfurther provide an audible alert ordriver seat may pulse indicating thata lane marking has been crossed.



To turn LKA on and off, pressAto the left of the steering wheel.If equipped, the indicator light on thebutton comes on when LKA is onand turns off when LKA is disabled.

When on,A is white, if equipped,indicating that the system is notready to assist.A is green if LKAis ready to assist and alert if thevehicle crosses detected markingson one or both sides of the lane.LKA may assist by gently turningthe steering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lanemarking.A is amber whenassisting. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW)alert by flashingA amber if thevehicle crosses a detected lanemarking. Additionally, there may bethree beeps, or the driver seat maypulse three times, on the right orleft, depending on the lanedeparture direction.

Take Steering

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.If LKA does not detect active driversteering, an alert, chime, or DICmessage may be provided. Steerthe vehicle to dismiss. LKA maybecome temporarily unavailableafter repeated take steering alerts.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads or inconstruction zones.

If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

A camera blocked message maydisplay if the camera is blocked.Some driver assistance systemsmay have reduced performance ornot work at all. Cleaning the outsideof the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue. The LKA system does notneed service.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks,shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.



Fuel

Top Tier FuelGM recommends the use of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline to keepthe engine clean, reduce enginedeposits, and maintain optimalvehicle performance. Look for theTOP TIER Logo or seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline marketersand applicable countries.

Recommended Fuel(L83 5.3L V8 Engine)

If the vehicle has a yellow sticker onthe fuel door, E85 or FlexFuel canbe used. If the vehicle does nothave a yellow sticker, do not usegasoline with ethanol levels greaterthan 15% by volume. See E85 orFlexFuel 0 255.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 —(R+M)/2 — or higher. Do not usegasoline with a posted octane ratingof less than 87, as this may causeengine knock and will lower fueleconomy.

Recommended Fuel(L86 6.2L V8 Engine)

Premium unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 93 —(R+M)/2 — is highly recommendedfor best performance and fueleconomy. Unleaded gasoline withan octane rated as low as 87 can beused. Using unleaded gasolinerated below 93 octane, however, willlead to reduced acceleration andfuel economy. If knocking occurs,use a gasoline rated at 93 octaneas soon as possible, otherwise, theengine could be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a 93 octane rating, theengine needs service.



Do not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.

Prohibited Fuels

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing somay damage the vehicle and voidits warranty:

. For vehicles that are notFlexFuel, fuel labeledgreater than 15% ethanol byvolume, such as mid-levelethanol blends (16–50%ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal,ferrocene, and aniline.These fuels can corrodemetal fuel system parts ordamage plastic and rubberparts.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl(MMT), which can damagethe emissions controlsystem and spark plugs.

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Usingthis fuel will lower fueleconomy and performance,and may decrease the life ofthe emissions catalyst.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knockindex (AKI). For fuel not to use in aforeign country, see ProhibitedFuels 0 255.

Fuel AdditivesTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline ishighly recommended for use withyour vehicle. If your country doesnot have TOP TIER DetergentGasoline, add ACDelco FuelSystem Treatment Plus−Gasoline tothe vehicle’s gasoline fuel tank atevery oil change or 15 000 km(9,000 mi), whichever occurs first.TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline andACDelco Fuel System TreatmentPlus−Gasoline will help keep yourvehicle’s engine fuel deposit freeand performing optimally.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel stickeron the fuel door can use eitherunleaded gasoline or fuel containingup to 85% ethanol (E85). All othervehicles should use only theunleaded gasoline as described inRecommended Fuel (L83 5.3LV8 Engine) 0 254 orRecommended Fuel (L86 6.2LV8 Engine) 0 254.



The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuel website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

The starting characteristics of E85or FlexFuel make it unsuitable foruse when temperatures fall below−18 °C (0 °F). Use gasoline or addgasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank 0 256.

The only GM approved aftermarketadditive is ACDelco Fuel SystemTreatment Plus-FlexFuel. Follow theinstructions on the bottle for properuse. This product is available atyour GM dealer.

Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Use only additivesapproved by GM for E85 orFlexFuel vehicles. Damagecaused by unapproved additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

To help keep the engine runningefficiently, fill the tank with gasoline,up to E15, after filling the tank withE85 one or two times.

Filling the TankAn arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates which side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on. See Fuel Gauge0 130.

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Follow these guidelines to helpavoid injuries to you and others:

. Read and follow all theinstructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Avoid using electronicdevices while refueling.

. Do not re-enter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Before touching the fillnozzle, touch a metallicobject to discharge staticelectricity from your body.

. Fuel can spray out if the fillnozzle is inserted tooquickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the fill nozzleslowly and wait for any hissnoise to stop beforebeginning to flow fuel.

To open the fuel door, push andrelease the rearward center edge ofthe door.

The capless refueling system doesnot have a fuel cap. Fully insert andlatch the fill nozzle, then beginfueling.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Under certain conditions,fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Waitfive seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the fillnozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 367. Push the fueldoor closed until it latches.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove the fillnozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Filling the Tank with a PortableFuel Container

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portable fuelcontainer:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.

{ Warning

Attempting to refuel from aportable fuel container withoutusing the funnel adapter maycause fuel spillage and damagethe capless fuel system. Thiscould cause a fire. You or otherscould be badly burned and thevehicle could be damaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return it to thestorage location.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. To help avoidinjury to you and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, in a pickupbed, or on any surface otherthan the ground.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle incontact with the inside ofthe fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle.Maintain contact until fillingis complete.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not use electronicdevices while pumping fuel.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle to tow a trailer. Read theentire section before towing a trailer.

To tow a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 363. To towthe vehicle behind another vehiclesuch as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 364.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ Warning

You can lose control when towinga trailer if the correct equipment isnot used or the vehicle is notdriven properly. For example,if the trailer is too heavy or the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

trailer brakes are inadequate forthe load, the vehicle may not stopas expected. You and otherscould be seriously injured. Thevehicle may also be damaged,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these are



important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with and followall state and local laws thatapply to trailer towing. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

. State laws may require the useof extended side view mirrors.Even if not required, you shouldinstall extended side viewmirrors if your visibility is limitedor restricted while towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) of vehicleuse to prevent damage to theengine, axle, or other parts.

. It is recommended to performthe first oil change before heavytowing.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi)of trailer towing, do not driveover 80 km/h (50 mph) and donot make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Tow/Haul Mode is recommendedfor heavier trailers. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 218. If thetransmission downshifts toooften, a lower gear may beselected using Manual Mode.See Manual Mode 0 216.

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should beturned off when towing a trailer:

. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

. Super Cruise Control

. Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

. Park Assist

. Automatic Parking Assist (APA)

. Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB)

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should beturned to alert or off when towing atrailer:

. Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB)

. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

If equipped with Lane Change Alert(LCA), the LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer.

If equipped with Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA), use caution whilebacking up when towing a trailer, asthe RCTA detection zones thatextend out from the back of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.


. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outsideair. See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 212.

Towing a trailer requires experience.The combination of the vehicle andtrailer is longer and not asresponsive as the vehicle itself. Getused to the handling and braking ofthe combination by driving on alevel road surface before driving onpublic roads.

The trailer structure, the tires, andthe brakes must be all be rated tocarry the intended cargo.Inadequate trailer equipment cancause the combination to operate inan unexpected or unsafe manner.Before driving, inspect all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. See TowingEquipment 0 270. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and thenmanually apply the trailer brakecontroller to check the trailer brakeswork. During the trip, occasionallycheck that the cargo and trailer aresecure and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are working.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the stability controlsystem might be heard. The systemreacts to vehicle movement causedby the trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normalwhen towing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving without a trailer. This canhelp to avoid heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination of the vehicle andtrailer will not accelerate as quicklyand is much longer than the vehiclealone. It is necessary to go muchfarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane. Passon level roadways. Avoid passingon hills if possible.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move that hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Caution

Turn more slowly and make widerarcs when towing a trailer toprevent damage to your vehicle.Making very sharp turns couldcause the trailer to contact thevehicle.

Make wider turns than normal whentowing, so trailer will not go over softshoulders, over curbs, or strike roadsigns, trees, or other objects.Always signal turns well in advance.Do not steer or brake suddenly.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downhill grade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes may overheat and result inreduced braking efficiency.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

When towing at higher altitudes,engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at lower altitudes.If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle could show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run, preferably onlevel ground, with the transmissionin P (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 300.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or death,always park your vehicle andtrailer on a level surface whenpossible.

When parking your vehicle and yourtrailer on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, gradually release thebrake pedal to allow the chocksto absorb the load of the trailer.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).


Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brakepedal.

. Start the engine.

. Shift into a gear.

. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.



3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Launching and Retrievinga Boat

Backing the Trailer into the Water

{ Warning

. Have all passengers get outof the vehicle beforebacking onto the sloped partof the ramp. Lower thedriver and passenger sidewindows before backingonto the ramp. This willprovide a means of escapein the unlikely event thevehicle slides into the water.

. If the boat launch surface isslippery, have the driverremain in the vehicle withthe brake pedal appliedwhile the boat is beinglaunched. The boat launch

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

can be especially slippery atlow tide when part of theramp was previouslysubmerged at high tide. Donot back onto the ramp tolaunch the boat if you arenot sure the vehicle canmaintain traction.

. Do not move the vehicle ifsomeone is in the path ofthe trailer. Some parts of thetrailer might be underwaterand not visible to peoplewho are assisting inlaunching the boat.

Disconnect the wiring to the trailerbefore backing the trailer into thewater to prevent damage to theelectrical circuits on the trailer.Reconnect the wiring to the trailerafter removing the trailer from thewater. If the trailer has electricbrakes that can function when thetrailer is submerged, it might help to

leave the electrical trailer connectorattached to maintain trailer brakefunctionality while on the boat ramp.

To back the trailer into the water:

1. If equipped, place the vehiclein four-wheel-drive high.

2. Slowly back down the boatramp until the boat is floating,but no further than necessary.

3. Press and hold the brakepedal, but do not shift intoP (Park) yet.

4. Have someone place chocksunder the front wheels of thevehicle.

5. Gradually release the brakepedal to allow the chocks toabsorb the load of the trailer.

6. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).


Pulling the Trailer from the Water

1. Press and hold the brakepedal.



2. Start the engine and shift intoa gear.


4. Let up on the brake pedal.

5. Drive slowly until the tires areclear of the chocks.

6. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

7. Slowly pull the trailer from thewater.

8. Once the vehicle and trailerhave been driven from thesloped part of the boat ramp,the vehicle can be shifted fromfour-wheel-drive high. Shift intothe drive mode that isappropriate for the roadconditions.

Caution

If the vehicle tires begin to spinand the vehicle begins to slidetoward the water, remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

and apply the brake pedal. Seekhelp to have the vehicle towed upthe ramp.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when used to tow trailers. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379. It isespecially important to check theautomatic transmission fluid, engineoil, axle lubricant, belts, coolingsystem, and brake system beforeand during each trip.

Check periodically that all nuts andbolts on the trailer hitch are tight.

Engine Cooling when TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 300.

Trailer Towing

Caution

Towing a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To tow a trailercorrectly, follow the directions inthis section and see your dealerfor important information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

Trailer Weight

{ Warning

Never exceed the towing capacityfor your vehicle.

Safe trailering requires monitoringthe weight, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature,dimensions of the front of the trailer,and how frequently the vehicle isused to tow a trailer.



Trailering Weight Ratings

When towing a trailer, the combinedweight of the vehicle, vehiclecontents, trailer, and trailer contentsmust be below all of the maximumweight ratings for the vehicle,including:

. GCWR: Gross Combined WeightRating

. GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating

. Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

. GAWR-RR: Gross Axle WeightRating-Rear

. Maximum Trailer Tongue WeightRating

See “Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment” under TowingEquipment 0 270 to determine ifequalizer bars are required to obtainthe maximum trailer weight rating.

See “Trailer Brakes” under TowingEquipment 0 270 to determine ifbrakes are required based on yourtrailer's weight.

The only way to be sure the weightis not exceeding any of theseratings is to weigh the tow vehicleand trailer combination, fully loadedfor the trip, getting individualweights for each of these items.

{ Warning

You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed if the trailer is tooheavy or the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load. Thevehicle may be damaged, and therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Only tow a trailer if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer.

Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR)

GCWR is the total allowable weightof the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any fuel,passengers, cargo, equipment, andaccessories. Do not exceed the

GCWR for your vehicle. The GCWRfor the vehicle is on the Tow RatingChart following.

To check that the weight of thevehicle and trailer are within theGCWR for the vehicle, follow thesesteps:

. Start with the "curb weight" fromthe trailering information label

. Add the weight of the trailerloaded with cargo and ready forthe trip

. Add the weight of all passengers

. Add the weight of all cargo in thevehicle

. Add the weight of hitch hardwaresuch as a draw bar, ball, loadequalizer bars, or sway bars

. Add the weight of anyaccessories or aftermarketequipment added to the vehicle

The resulting weight cannot exceedthe GCWR value shown on theTrailering Information Label.



The gross combined weight canalso be confirmed by weighing thevehicle and trailer on a public scale.The vehicle and trailer should beloaded for the trip with passengersand cargo.

Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR)

For information about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 196. When calculatingthe GVWR with a trailer attached,the trailer tongue weight must beincluded as part of the weight thevehicle is carrying.

Maximum Trailer Weight

The maximum trailer weight rating iscalculated assuming only the driveris in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Use the tow rating chart todetermine how much the trailer canweigh, based on the vehicle modeland options.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Yukon Denali 2WD 3.23 3 810 kg (8,400 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon Denali 4WD 3.23 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL Denali 2WD 3.23 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL Denali 4WD 3.23 3 583 kg (7,900 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.


Yukon 2WD 3.42 3 856 kg (8,500 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon AWD 3.42 3 719 kg (8,200 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL 2WD 3.42 3 765 kg (8,300 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL AWD 3.42 3 629 kg (8,000 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)





Yukon 2WD 3.08 2 948kg (6,500 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)

Yukon AWD 3.08 2 858 kg (6,300 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)

Yukon XL 2WD 3.08 2 858kg (6,300 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)

Yukon XL AWD 3.08 2 721 kg (6,000 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)


Maximum Trailer TongueWeight Rating

The Maximum Trailer TongueWeight Rating is the allowabletrailer tongue weight that the vehiclecan support using a conventionaltrailer hitch. It may be necessary toreduce the overall trailer weight tostay within the maximum trailertongue weight rating while stillmaintaining the correct trailer loadbalance.



Vehicle Series Hitch TypeMaximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lb)

1500 Weight Distributing 453 kg (1,000 lb)

The trailer tongue weight contributesto the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW).GVW includes the CURB WEIGHTof your vehicle, any passengers,cargo, equipment and the trailertongue weight. Vehicle options,passengers, cargo, and equipmentreduce the maximum allowabletongue weight the vehicle can carry,which also reduces the maximumallowable trailer weight.

Trailer Load Balance

The correct trailer load balancemust be maintained to ensure trailerstability. Incorrect load balance is aleading cause of trailer sway.

The trailer tongue weight (1) shouldbe 10–15% of the total loaded trailerweight (2). Some specific trailertypes, such as boat trailers, falloutside of this range. Always referto the trailer owner’s manual for therecommended trailer tongue weightfor each trailer. Never exceed themaximum loads for your vehicle,hitch and trailer.

The trailer load balance percentageis calculated as: weight (1) dividedby weight (2) times 100.

After loading the trailer, separatelyweigh the trailer and then the trailertongue and calculate the trailer loadbalance percentage to see if theweights and distribution areappropriate for your vehicle. If thetrailer weight is too high, it may bepossible to trasfer some of thecargo into your vehicle. If the trailertongue weight is too high or too low,it may be possible to rearrangesome of the cargo inside of thetrailer.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for yourvehicle. Use the shortest hitchextension available to position thehitch ball closer to your vehicle. Thiswill help reduce the effect of thetrailer tongue weight on the trailerhitch and the rear axle.

If a cargo carrier is used in thetrailer hitch receiver, choose acarrier that positions the load asclose to the vehicle as possible.Make sure the total weight,



including the carrier, is no more thanhalf of the maximum allowabletongue weight for the vehicle or227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR-RR)

The GAWR-RR is the total weightthat can be supported by the rearaxle of the vehicle. Do not exceedthe GAWR-RR for the vehicle, withthe tow vehicle and trailer fullyloaded for the trip including theweight of the trailer tongue. If usinga weight-distributing hitch, do notexceed the GAWR-RR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or assistance.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Always use the correct hitchequipment for your vehicle.Crosswinds, large trucks going by,and rough roads can affect thetrailer and the hitch.

Proper hitch equipment for yourvehicle helps maintain control of thevehicle-trailer combination. Manytrailers can be towed using aweight-carrying hitch which has acoupler latched to the hitch ball, or atow eye latched to a pintle hook.Other trailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight between your vehicleand trailer axles. See “MaximumTrailer Tongue Weight Rating” underTrailer Towing 0 264 for weight limitswith various hitch types.

Never attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches. Only useframe-mounted hitches that do notattach to the bumper.



Hitch Cover

To remove hitch cover, if equipped:

1. Remove the two fasteners onthe lower tabs (2).

2. Pull the lower edge of thecover to about a 45 degreeangle.

3. Pull the cover upward todisengage the upperattachments (1).

To reinstall hitch cover:

1. Hold cover at a 45 degreeangle to the vehicle and pushthe upper tabs into the slots inthe bumper.

2. Push the bottom of the coverforward until the lower tabs lineup with the lower slots.

3. Snap the hitch cover into placeby pushing the upper cornersforward (1).

4. Reinstall the two fasteners onthe lower tabs (2).

Consider using mechanical swaycontrols with any trailer. Ask atrailering professional about swaycontrols or refer to the trailermanufacturer's recommendationsand instructions.

Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment

A weight-distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers. Use thefollowing guidelines to determine if aweight-distributing hitch shouldbe used.



Vehicle Series Trailer WeightWeight-Distributing Hitch

Usage Hitch Distribution

1500 Up to 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Optional Refer to trailermanufacturer’s

recommendation

1500 Over 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Required 50%

1. Front of Vehicle2. Body to Ground Distance

When using a weight-distributinghitch, measure the front fenderheight above the front axledistance (2) before and afterconnecting trailer. Adjust the spring

bars until the front fender heightdistance (2) is approximately halfway between the first and secondmeasurements.

If equipped with Automatic LevelControl 0 229, it is recommended toallow the shocks to inflate, levelingthe vehicle prior to adjusting thehitch.

Tires. Do not tow a trailer while using a

compact spare tire on thevehicle.

. Tires must be properly inflated tosupport loads while towing atrailer. See Tires 0 326 forinstructions on proper tireinflation.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer, and attachthe chains to the holes on the trailerhitch platform. Instructions aboutsafety chains may be provided bythe hitch manufacturer or by thetrailer manufacturer.

Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help preventthe tongue from contacting the roadif it becomes separated from thehitch. Always leave just enoughslack so the combination can turn.Never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.



Trailer Brakes

Loaded trailers over 900 kg(2,000 lb) must be equipped withbrake systems and with brakes foreach axle. Trailer braking equipmentconforming to Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA) requirementCAN3-D313, or its equivalent, isrecommended.

State or local regulations mayrequire trailers to have their ownbraking system if the loaded weightof the trailer exceeds certainminimums that can vary from stateto state. Read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes sothey are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly. Never attemptto tap into your vehicle's hydraulicbrake system. If you do, both thevehicle anti-lock brakes and thetrailer brakes may not function,which could result in a crash.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The seven-pin trailer connector ismounted in the bumper. Thisconnector can be plugged into a

seven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer.

Use only a round, seven-wireconnector with flat blade terminalsmeeting SAE J2863 specificationsfor proper electrical connectivity.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

. Yellow/Grey: Left Stop/TurnSignal

. Green/Violet: Right Stop/TurnSignal

. Grey/Brown: Taillamps

. White: Ground

. White/Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red/Green: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

To help charge a remote(non-vehicle) battery, press the Tow/Haul Mode button at the end of theshift lever. If the trailer is too light forTow/Haul Mode, turn on theheadlamps to help charge thebattery.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller.

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.

Refer to the aftermarket electrictrailer brake controller owner'smanual to determine wire colorcoding of the electric trailer brakecontroller. The wire colors on thebrake controller may be differentfrom the vehicle.

Trailer Lamps

Always check all trailer lamps areworking at the beginning of eachtrip, and periodically on longer trips.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

When properly connected, the trailerturn signals should will illuminate toindicate the vehicle is turning,



changing lanes, or stopping. Whentowing a trailer, the arrows on theinstrument cluster will illuminateeven if the trailer is not properlyconnected or the bulbs areburned out.

Tow/Haul Mode

For instructions on how to enterTow/Haul mode, see Tow/HaulMode 0 218.

Tow/Haul assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Tow/Haul Mode is designed to bemost effective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75% of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Maximum Trailer Weight”under Trailer Towing 0 264.

Tow/Haul Mode is most useful whentowing a heavy trailer or carrying alarge or heavy load:

. through rolling terrain

. in stop-and-go traffic

. in busy parking lots

Operating the vehicle in Tow/HaulMode when lightly loaded or nottowing will not cause damage;however, it is not recommended andmay result in unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy.

Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor use with electric trailer brakes ormost electric over hydraulic trailerbrake systems. These instructionsapply to both types of electric trailerbrakes.

This symbol is on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel on vehicles with anITBC system. The power output tothe trailer brakes is proportional tothe amount of vehicle braking. This

available power output to the trailerbrakes can be adjusted to a widerange of trailering situations.

The ITBC system is integrated withthe vehicle’s brake, anti-lock brake,and StabiliTrak systems. In traileringconditions that cause the vehicle’santi-lock brake or StabiliTraksystems to activate, power sent tothe trailer's brakes will beautomatically adjusted to minimizetrailer wheel lock-up. This does notimply that the trailer has StabiliTrak.

If the vehicle’s brake, anti-lockbrake, or StabiliTrak systems arenot functioning properly, the ITBCsystem may not function fully or atall. Make sure all of these systemsare fully operational to allow theITBC system to function properly.

The ITBC system is poweredthrough the vehicle's electricalsystem. Turning the ignition off willalso turn off the ITBC system. TheITBC system is fully functional onlywhen the ignition is in ON/RUN.



{ Warning

Connecting a trailer that has anair brake system may result inreduced or complete loss of trailerbraking, including increasedstopping distance or trailerinstability which could result inserious injury, death, or propertydamage. Only use the ITBCsystem with electric or electricover hydraulic trailer brakesystems.

Trailer Brake Control Panel

1. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

2. Trailer Gain AdjustmentButtons

The ITBC control panel is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering column. The control panelallows adjustment to the amount ofoutput, referred to as Trailer Gain,available to the trailer brakes andallows manual application of thetrailer brakes. Use the ITBC controlpanel and the DIC trailer brakedisplay page to adjust and displaypower output to the trailer brakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC display page indicates:

. Trailer Gain setting

. Output to the trailer brakes

. Trailer connection

. System operational status.

To display:

. Scroll through the DIC menupages

. Press a Trailer Gain (+) or (−)button

. Activate the Manual TrailerBrake Apply Lever

TRAILER GAIN:

Press a Trailer Gain button to recallthe current Trailer Gain setting.Each press and release of the gainbuttons will then change the TrailerGain setting. Press the TrailerGain (+) or (−) to adjust. Press andhold to continuously adjust theTrailer Gain. To turn the output tothe trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gainsetting to 0.0. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with atrailer connected or disconnected.

TRAILER OUTPUT: This displaysanytime a trailer with electric brakesis connected. Output to the trailerbrakes is based on the amount ofvehicle braking present and relativeto the Trailer Gain setting. Output isdisplayed from 0 to 100% for eachgain setting.

The Trailer Output will indicate “- - -- - -” on the Trailer Brake DisplayPage whenever the following occur:

. No trailer is connected.


276 Driving and Operating. A trailer without electric brakes

is connected, no DIC messagewill display

. A trailer with electric brakes hasbecome disconnected, a CHECKTRAILER WIRING messagedisplays on the DIC

. There is a fault present in thewiring to the trailer brakes, aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage displays on the DIC

. The ITBC system is not workingdue to a fault, a SERVICETRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMmessage displays in the DIC

Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever

Slide this lever left to apply thetrailer’s electric brakes independentof the vehicle’s brakes. Use thislever to adjust Trailer Gain toachieve the proper power output tothe trailer brakes. The trailer's andthe vehicle's brake lamps will comeon when either vehicle brakes ormanual trailer brakes are appliedand properly connected.

Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition and itmust be readjusted anytime vehicleloading, trailer loading, or roadsurface conditions change.

{ Warning

Trailer brakes that areover-gained or under-gained maynot stop the vehicle and the traileras intended and can result in acrash. Always follow theinstructions to set the Trailer Gainfor the proper trailer stoppingperformance.

To adjust Trailer Gain for eachtowing condition:

1. Drive the vehicle with the trailerattached on a level roadsurface representative of thetowing condition and free oftraffic at about 32 to 40 km/h(20 to 25 mph) and fully applythe Manual Trailer Brake applylever.

NoteAdjusting Trailer Gain at speedslower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) may result in an incorrectgain setting.

2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, usingthe Trailer Gain adjustmentbuttons, to just below the pointof trailer wheel lock-up,indicated by trailer wheelsqueal or tire smoke when atrailer wheel locks.

NoteTrailer wheel lock-up may not occurif towing a heavily loaded trailer. Inthis case, adjust the Trailer Gain tothe highest allowable setting for thetowing condition.

3. Readjust Trailer Gain any timevehicle loading, trailer loading,or road surface conditionschange or if trailer wheellock-up is noticed at any timewhile towing.



Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages

TRAILER CONNECTED: Thismessage will briefly display when atrailer with electric brakes is firstconnected to the vehicle. Thismessage will automatically turn offin about 10 seconds. This messagecan be acknowledged before itautomatically turns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING: Thismessage will display if:

. The ITBC system firstdetermines connection to atrailer with electric brakes andthen the trailer harness becomesdisconnected the vehicle.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stationary, thismessage will automatically turnoff in about 30 seconds. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage will continue until theignition is turned off. This

message will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

. There is an electrical fault in thewiring to the trailer brakes. Thismessage will continue as longas there is an electrical fault inthe trailer wiring. This messagewill also turn off if it isacknowledged.

To determine whether the electricalfault is on the vehicle side or trailerside of the trailer wiring harnessconnection:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.


3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILERWIRING message reappears,the electrical fault is on thevehicle side.

If the CHECK TRAILERWIRING message onlyreappears when connecting the

trailer wiring harness to thevehicle, the electrical fault is onthe trailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM: This message will displaywhen there is a problem with theITBC system. If this messagecontinues over multiple ignitioncycles, there is a problem with theITBC system. Have the vehicleserviced.

If either the CHECK TRAILERWIRING or SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message displayswhile driving, the ITBC system maynot be fully functional or may notfunction at all. When trafficconditions allow, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of the roadand turn the ignition off. Check thewiring connection to the trailer andturn the ignition back on. If either ofthese messages continues, eitherthe vehicle or trailer needs service.

A GM dealer may be able todiagnose and repair problems withthe trailer. However, any diagnosisand repair of the trailer is notcovered under the vehicle warranty.



Contact your trailer dealer forassistance with trailer repairs andtrailer warranty information.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTrailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.Trailer sway is unintendedside-to-side motion of a trailer whiletowing. If the vehicle is towing atrailer and the TSC detects thatsway is increasing, the vehiclebrakes are selectively applied ateach wheel, to help reduceexcessive trailer sway. If equippedwith the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, and thetrailer has an electric brake system,StabiliTrak may also apply the trailerbrakes.

If TSC is enabled, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakwarning light will flash on theinstrument cluster. Reduce vehiclespeed by gradually removing yourfoot from the accelerator. If trailersway continues, StabiliTrak canreduce engine torque to help slowthe vehicle. TSC will not function ifStabiliTrak is turned off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 226.

{ Warning

Trailer sway can result in a crashand in serious injury or death,even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If the trailer begins to sway,reduce vehicle speed bygradually removing your foot fromthe accelerator. Then pull over tocheck the trailer and vehicle tohelp correct possible causes,including an improperly oroverloaded trailer, unrestrainedcargo, improper trailer hitchconfiguration, or improperlyinflated or incorrect vehicle ortrailer tires. See TowingEquipment 0 270 for trailer ratingsand hitch setuprecommendations.

Aftermarket Electronic TrailerSway Control Devices

Some trailers may come equippedwith an electronic device designedto reduce or control trailer sway.Aftermarket equipmentmanufacturers also offer similardevices that connect to the wiringbetween the trailer and the vehicle.These devices may interfere with



the vehicle’s trailer brake systemsor other systems, includingintegrated anti-sway systems,if equipped. Messages related totrailer connections or trailer brakescould appear on the DIC. Theeffects of these aftermarket deviceson vehicle handling or trailer brakeperformance is not known.

{ Warning

Use of aftermarket electronictrailer sway control devices couldresult in reduced trailer brakeperformance, loss of trailerbrakes, or other malfunctions, andresult in a crash. You or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. Before using one of thesedevices:

. Ask the device or trailermanufacturer if the devicehas been thoroughly testedfor compatibility with themake, model, and year of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

your vehicle and anyoptional equipment installedon your vehicle.

. Before driving, check thetrailer brakes are workingproperly, if equipped. Drivethe vehicle with the trailerattached on a level roadsurface that is free of trafficat about 32-40 km/h(20-25 mph) and fully applythe manual trailer brakeapply lever. Also, check thetrailer brake lamps andother lamps are functioningcorrectly.

. If the trailer brakes are notoperating properly at anytime, or if a DIC messageindicates problems with thetrailer connections or trailerbrakes, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side ofthe road when trafficconditions allow.

Trailer Tires

Special Trailer (ST) tires differ fromvehicle tires. Trailer tires aredesigned with stiff sidewalls to helpprevent sway and to support heavyloads. These features can make itdifficult to determine if the trailer tirepressures are low only based on avisual inspection.

Always check all trailer tirepressures before each trip when thetires are cool. Low trailer tirepressure is a leading cause of trailertire blow-outs.

Trailer tires deteriorate over time.The trailer tire sidewall will show theweek and year the tire wasmanufactured. Many trailer tiremanufacturers recommendreplacing tires more than sixyears old.

Overloading is another leadingcause of trailer tire blow-outs. Neverload your trailer with more weightthan the tires are designed tosupport. The load rating is locatedon the trailer tire sidewall.



Always know the maximum speedrating for the trailer tires beforedriving. This may be significantlylower than the vehicle tire speedrating. The speed rating may be onthe trailer tire sidewall. If the speedrating is not shown, the defaulttrailer tire speed rating is 105 km/h(65 mph).

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 136. A device connected to the DLC— such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 84 andAdding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 84.


Vehicle Care 281

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 282California Proposition

65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements . . . . . 283Accessories and

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your Own

Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Engine Compartment

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 291Automatic Transmission Fluid

(6-Speed Transmission) . . . . . 292Automatic Transmission Fluid

(10-Speed Transmission) . . . 295Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 296Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 300Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Battery - North America . . . . . . 305Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 306Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 308Automatic Transmission Shift

Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 309

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 309Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 310Windshield Replacement . . . . . 310Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 312High Intensity Discharge (HID)

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 314

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 314Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 315Engine Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Instrument Panel Fuse Block

(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Instrument Panel Fuse

Block (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Rear Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 329Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Tire Terminology and

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Tire Pressure for High-Speed

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Tire Pressure Monitor

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340


282 Vehicle Care

Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340When It Is Time for New

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Different Size Tires and

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Uniform Tire Quality

Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 346Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 359

Jump StartingJump Starting - North

America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 363Recreational Vehicle

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 Warning

{ Warning

Most motor vehicles, includingthis one, as well as many of itsservice parts and fluids, containand/or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts andsystems, many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See Battery - North America 0 305andJump Starting - North America0 360 and the back cover.


Vehicle Care 283

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inelectronic keys, may containperchlorate materials. PerchlorateMaterial – special handling mayapply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 84.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner’s manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, seePublication Ordering Information0 405.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 84.


284 Vehicle Care

If equipped with remote vehiclestart, open the hood beforeperforming any service work toprevent remote starting the vehicleaccidentally. See Remote VehicleStart 0 23.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 391.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

Hood

{ Warning

Turn the vehicle off beforeopening the hood. If the engine isrunning with the hood open, youor others could be injured.

{ Warning

Components under the hood canget hot from running the engine.To help avoid the risk of burningunprotected skin, never touchthese components until they havecooled, and always use a glove ortowel to avoid direct skin contact.

Clear any snow from the hoodbefore opening.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release lever withthei symbol. It is on thelower left side of the instrumentpanel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicleand locate the secondaryrelease lever under the frontcenter of the hood. Push thesecondary hood release leverto the right to release.


Vehicle Care 285

3. After you have partially liftedthe hood, the spring system willautomatically lift the hood andhold it in the fully openposition.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, besure all filler caps are onproperly, and all tools areremoved.

2. Pull the hood down until thespring system is no longerholding up the hood.

3. Allow the hood to fall. Check tomake sure the hood is latchedcompletely. Repeat thisprocess with additional force ifnecessary.

{ Warning

Do not drive the vehicle if thehood is not latched completely.The hood could open fully, blockyour vision, and cause a crash.You or others could be injured.Always close the hood completelybefore driving.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)will display a message if the hood isnot fully closed, and the vehicle ismoving. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.


286 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

5.3L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 287

1. Positive (+) Terminal. SeeJump Starting - North America0 360.

2. Battery - North America 0 305.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem 0 297.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 296.

5. Automatic TransmissionDipstick. See “How to CheckAutomatic Transmission Fluid”under Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-Speed Transmission)0 292 orAutomatic Transmission Fluid(10-Speed Transmission)0 295.

6. Remote Negative (–) Location(Out of View). See JumpStarting - North America 0 360.

7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 297.

8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 289.

9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 289.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 302.

11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 304.

12. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 315.


288 Vehicle Care

6.2L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 289

1. Positive (+) Terminal. SeeJump Starting - North America0 360.

2. Battery - North America 0 305.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem 0 297.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 296.

5. Remote Negative (–) Location(Out of View). See JumpStarting - North America 0 360.

6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 297.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 289.

8. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 289.

9. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 302.

10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 304.

11. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 315.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 291.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

If equipped, the ENGINE OIL LOWADD OIL message displays whenthe engine oil level may be too low.Check the oil level before filling tothe recommended level. If the oil isnot low and this message remainson, see your dealer.

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especiallyprior to a long trip. The engine oildipstick handle is a loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 286 for the location.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground.Check the engine oil level afterthe engine has been off for atleast two hours. Checking the


290 Vehicle Care

engine oil level on steep gradesor too soon after engine shutoffcan result in incorrect readings.Accuracy improves whenchecking a cold engine prior tostarting. Remove the dipstickand check the level.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine iswarm, or at least 30 minutes ifthe engine is not warm. Pull outthe dipstick, wipe it with a cleanpaper towel or cloth, then push itback in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick andthe engine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section foran explanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications 0 393.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If the oil level isabove the operating range (i.e.,the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range), theengine could be damaged. Drainthe excess oil or limit driving ofthe vehicle, and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 286 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.

Specification

Use full synthetic engine oils thatmeet the dexos1 specification.

Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.


Vehicle Care 291

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never

dispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, aCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes on to indicate thatan oil change is necessary. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600 mi). It ispossible that, if driving under the


292 Vehicle Care

best conditions, the oil life systemmay indicate that an oil change isnot necessary for up to a year. Theengine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the engine oil life system:

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 144.

2. Press and hold V. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 144.

2. Fully press the acceleratorpedal slowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. If the displayshows 100%, the system isreset.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started and/or theREMAINING OIL LIFE is near 0%,the engine oil life system has notbeen reset. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak issuspected, then use the followingchecking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is alarge leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to adealer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use the correct

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 293

Caution (Continued)

automatic transmission fluid. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 379. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Caution

Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Toomuch can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall onhot engine parts or exhaustsystem parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

transmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading ifchecking the transmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface.Keep the engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range.Then, move the shift lever backto P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle (500–800 rpm) for at leastone minute. Slowly release thebrake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andcheck the transmission fluidtemperature on the Driver

Information Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 144.

6. Using the transmission fluidtemperature reading, determineand perform the appropriatecheck procedure. If thetransmission fluid temperaturereading is not within therequired temperature ranges,allow the vehicle to cool,or operate the vehicle until theappropriate transmission fluidtemperature is reached.

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as areference to determine if thetransmission has enough fluid to beoperated safely until a hot checkprocedure can be made. The hotcheck procedure is the mostaccurate method to check the fluidlevel. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedure tocheck fluid level when thetransmission temperature isbetween 27 °C and 32 °C (80 °F and90 °F).


294 Vehicle Care

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 286.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of thedipstick and read the lowerlevel. Repeat the checkprocedure to verify the reading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLDband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pt). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the firstopportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71 °C to 93 °C (160 °F to200 °F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperature isbetween 71 °C and 93 °C (160 °Fand 200 °F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level. Thehot check should be performed atthe first opportunity in order to verifythe cold check. The fluid level risesas fluid temperature increases, so itis important to ensure thetransmission temperature is withinrange.

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 286.


Vehicle Care 295

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of thedipstick and read the lowerlevel. Repeat the checkprocedure to verify the reading.

5. Safe operating level is withinthe HOT cross hatch band onthe dipstick. If the fluid level isnot within the HOT band, andthe transmission temperature isbetween 71 °C and 93 °C(160 °F and 200 °F), add ordrain fluid as necessary tobring the level into the HOTband. If the fluid level is low,

add only enough fluid to bringthe level into the HOT band.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt).Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (10-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is a

transmission leak or overheatedtransmission. This vehicle is notequipped with a transmission fluidlevel dipstick. There is a specialprocedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid inthese vehicles. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. See PublicationOrdering Information 0 405.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use the correctautomatic transmission fluid. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 379. Be sure to use the


296 Vehicle Care

transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview0 286 for the location of the engineair cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filter, see Maintenance Schedule0 379.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Remove the engine aircleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shakethe engine air cleaner/filter (awayfrom the vehicle), to release loose

dust and dirt. Inspect the engine aircleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not cleanthe engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Screws (4)2. Electrical Connector3. Air Duct Clamp

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 286.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air ductclamp (3).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and theconnector harness from thecover.

4. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the cover of the housingand lift up the cover.

5. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Takecare to dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

6. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

7. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2-4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.


Vehicle Care 297

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. Use cautionwhen working on the engine. Donot start the engine or drive thevehicle with the air cleaner/filteroff, as flames may be present ifthe engine backfires.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1. Coolant Surge Tank2. Coolant Surge Tank

Pressure Cap3. Engine Electric

Cooling Fan(s)

{ Warning

An underhood electric fan canstart up even when the engine isnot running and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ Warning

Do not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts.They can be very hot and canburn you. Do not run the engine ifthere is a leak; all coolant couldleak out. That could cause anengine fire and can burn you. Fixany leak before driving thevehicle.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 300.


298 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature

. Protects against rust andcorrosion

. Will not damage aluminum parts

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature

Caution

Do not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM StandardGMW3420 and clean, drinkablewater. Anything else can causedamage to the engine coolingsystem and the vehicle, whichwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water. Havethe coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regarding

used coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 286.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank is


Vehicle Care 299

boiling, wait until it cools down. Thecoolant level should be at or abovethe full cold mark. If it is not, theremay be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the full coldmark, see “How to Add Coolant tothe Coolant Surge Tank,” following.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Warning

Spilling coolant on hot engineparts can burn you. Coolantcontains ethylene glycol and it willburn if the engine parts are hotenough.

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. With

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

plain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.

Caution

Failure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and couldcause system damage. If coolantis not visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.


300 Vehicle Care

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the fullcold mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theengine coolant temperaturegauge indicates approximately90 °C (195 °F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches thefull cold mark.

5. Replace the pressure captightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1–6.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure thecap is properly and tightlysecured.

Engine Overheating

Caution

Do not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of allcoolant and can damage thesystem and vehicle. Have anyleaks fixed right away.

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge in the vehicle's instrumentcluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge 0 131.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED messages in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program0 400.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Check to see if the engine coolingfan(s) are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If they are not, do notcontinue to run the engine. Have thevehicle serviced.


Vehicle Care 301

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam is seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing0 264.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or an overheat warning nolonger displays, the vehicle can bedriven. Continue to drive the vehicleslowly for about 10 minutes. Keep asafe vehicle distance from thevehicle in front. If the warning doesnot come back on, continue to drivenormally and have the coolingsystem checked for proper fill andfunction.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with anengine driven cooling fan, pushdown the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastfive minutes while the vehicle isparked. If the warning is still there,turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.


302 Vehicle Care

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has electric coolingfans, the fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,high outside temperatures,or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. Thefans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fansmay run after the engine has beenturned. off. This is normal and noservice is required.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 286 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 303

Caution (Continued)

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or canbe heard all the time when thevehicle is moving, except whenapplying the brake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in the

proper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 393.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or if parts are improperlyinstalled.


304 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with GM approved DOT 3brake fluid as indicated on thereservoir cap. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 286 forthe location of the reservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid

With the vehicle in P (Park) on alevel surface, the brake fluid levelshould be between the minimumand maximum marks on the brakefluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 138.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluidat the specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 388.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.


Vehicle Care 305

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 286 for battery location.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to cause

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 282 and the backcover.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 360 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule0 379 to determine when to checkthe lubricant.


306 Vehicle Care

How to Check Lubricant

Automatic Transfer Case

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.

When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule0 379 to determine how often tochange the lubricant.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Front AxleWhen to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the front axle fluid unless aleak is suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired. This servicecan be complex. See your dealer.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or drive axles andshould be replaced.

Rear AxleWhen to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the rear axle fluid unless aleak is suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired. This servicecan be complex. See your dealer.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or drive axles andshould be replaced.

Noise Control SystemNoise Emission Warranty

General Motors warrants to the firstperson who purchases this vehiclefor purposes other than resale andto each subsequent purchaser thatthis vehicle as manufactured byGeneral Motors was designed, builtand equipped to conform at the time


Vehicle Care 307

it left General Motors control with allapplicable U.S. EPA Noise ControlRegulations. This warranty coversthis vehicle as designed, built andequipped by General Motors and isnot limited to any particular part,component or system of the vehiclemanufactured by General Motors.Defects in design, assembly or anypart, component or system of thevehicle manufactured by GeneralMotors, which at the time it leftGeneral Motors control causednoise emissions to exceed Federalstandards, are covered by thewarranty for the life of the vehicle.

The following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lbs). The MaintenanceSchedule provides information onmaintaining the noise control systemto minimize degradation of the noiseemission control system during thelife of the vehicle. The noise controlsystem warranty is given in thevehicle warranty booklet.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person,other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for thepurpose of noise control, priorto its sale or delivery to theultimate purchaser or while it isin use; or

2. The use of the vehicle aftersuch device or element ofdesign has been removed orrendered inoperative by anyperson.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyunderhood insulation.

Engine:

Removal or rendering engine speedgovernor, if the vehicle has one,inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:

. Removal of fan clutch, if thevehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:

. Removal of the air cleanersilencer.

. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:

. Removal of the muffler and/orresonator.

. Removal of the exhaust pipesand exhaust pipe clamps.


308 Vehicle Care

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) with

normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckIf equipped with a Key Accessignition, while parked and with theparking brake set, try to turn theignition off in each shift leverposition.

. The ignition should turn off onlywhen the shift lever is inP (Park).

. The key should come out onlywhen the ignition is off.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 309

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts0 390.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Lift up on the latch in themiddle of the wiper bladewhere the wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough torelease it from the J-hookedend of the wiper arm.


310 Vehicle Care

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. With the rear wiper in the offposition, open the liftglass toaccess the rear wiper arm/blade.

The rear wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position souse care when pulling it awayfrom the vehicle.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely in the wiper arm hookuntil the release lever clicksinto place.

4. Return the wiper arm andblade assembly to the restposition on the glass.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealerto determine the correctreplacement glass.

Windshield Replacement

HUD System

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield must bereplaced, get one that is designedfor HUD or the HUD image maylook out of focus.

Driver Assistance Systems

If the windshield needs to bereplaced and the vehicle isequipped with a front camera sensorfor the Driver Assistance Systems, aGM replacement windshield is

recommended. The replacementwindshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forproper alignment. If it is not, thesesystems may not work properly, theymay display messages, or they maynot work at all. See your dealer forproper windshield replacement.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance inlifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full openposition.

{ Warning

If the gas struts that hold openthe hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail,you or others could be seriouslyinjured. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service immediately.Visually inspect the gas struts forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage periodically. Check tomake sure the hood/trunk/liftgate

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 311

Warning (Continued)

is held open with enough force.If struts are failing to hold thehood/trunk/liftgate, do notoperate. Have the vehicleserviced.

Caution

Do not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also donot push down or pull on gasstruts. This may cause damage tothe vehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 379.

Hood

Trunk

Liftgate


312 Vehicle Care

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, or any bulb changingprocedure not listed in this section,contact your dealer.

Caution

Do not replace incandescentbulbs with aftermarket LEDreplacement bulbs. This cancause damage to the vehicleelectrical system.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ Warning

The High Intensity Discharge(HID) lighting system operates ata very high voltage. If you try toservice any of the systemcomponents, you could beseriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

Fog Lamps

To replace the front fog lamp bulb:

1. Locate the fog lamp under thefront bumper.


Vehicle Care 313

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the fog lampbulb assembly by pressing theconnector release.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseto remove it from the housing.

Back-Up LampsTo replace a back-up bulb:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate0 27.

2. Remove the taillamp closeoutcover from the lamp assemblyby pulling rearward from thetop and bottom at the sametime to unfasten the snap tabs.

3. Remove the two screws fromthe taillamp assembly.

4. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight back to remove.

5. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

6. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

7. Put a new bulb into the socket,insert it into the taillampassembly, and turn the bulbsocket clockwise until it clicks.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assemblyand tighten the screws.

9. Reinstall the taillamp cover bysnapping it into place.


314 Vehicle Care

License Plate Lamp

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. Bulb Socket2. Bulb3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the lamp assembly (3)toward the center of thevehicle.

2. Pull the lamp assembly downto remove.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socketand turn the bulb socketclockwise to install it into thelamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the releasetab locks into place.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical systemoverload. Fuses also protect powerdevices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thereare some spare fuses and a fusepuller in the left instrument panelfuse block. The same amperagefuse can also be borrowed. Choosesome feature of the vehicle that isnot needed to use and replace it assoon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.


Vehicle Care 315

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

{ Danger

Fuses and circuit breakers aremarked with their ampere rating.Do not exceed thespecified amperage rating whenreplacing fuses and circuitbreakers. Use of an oversizedfuse or circuit breaker can resultin a vehicle fire. You and otherscould be seriously injured orkilled.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis in the engine compartment, onthe driver side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuseblock.


316 Vehicle Care

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel fuse block.


Vehicle Care 317


318 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

1 Power assist steps

2 Antilock brakesystem pump

3 Interior BEC LT1

4 Passengermotorized seat belt

5 Suspensionlevelingcompressor

6 4WD transfer caseelectronic control

7 –

8 –

10 Electric parkingbrake/–

11 –

12 –

13 Interior BEC LT2

14 Rear BEC 1

15 –

16 –

Fuses Usage

17 Driver motorizedseat belt

18 –

19 –

20 –

21 Automaticheadlamp leveling/Exhaust solenoid

22 Fuel pump

23 Integrated chassiscontrol module

24 Real timedampening

25 Fuel pump powermodule

26 Active HydraulicAssist/ Batteryregulated voltagecontrol

27 –

28 Upfitter 2

30 Wiper

Fuses Usage

31 Trailer interfacemodule

32 –

33 –

34 Reverse lamps

35 Antilock brakesystem valve

36 Trailer brakes

38 –

39 Right trailerstoplamp/Turnsignal lamp

40 Left trailerstoplamp/turnsignal lamp

41 Trailer parkinglamps

42 Right parkinglamps

43 Left parking lamps

44 Upfitter 3


Vehicle Care 319

Fuses Usage

45 Automatic levelcontrol/Run/Crank

46 –

47 Upfitter 4

49 Reverse lamps

50 –

52 –

53 –

54 –

55 –

56 –

57 –

58 –

59 Euro trailer

60 Air conditioningcontrol

61 –

62 –

63 Upfitter 1

64 –

Fuses Usage

65 –

66 –

67 Trailer battery

68 Secondaryfuel pump

69 RC upfitter 3 and 4

70 VBATupfitter 3 and 4

71 –

73 –

74 Engine controlmodule/Ignition

75 Miscellaneous/Ignition/–

76 Transmission/Ignition

77 RC upfitter 1 and 2

78 VBATupfitter 1 and 2

79 –

80 –

81 –

Fuses Usage

82 –

83 Euro trailer/RC

85 –

86 –

87 MAF/IAT/Humidity/TIAP sensor

88 Injector A – odd

89 Injector B – even

90 O2 sensor B

91 Throttle control

93 Horn

94 Fog lamps

95 High-beamheadlamps

96 –

97 –

98 –

99 –

100 O2 sensor A

101 Engine controlmodule


320 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

102 Engine controlmodule/Transmissioncontrol module

103 Auxiliary interiorheater

104 Starter

105 –

106 –

107 Aeroshutter

108 –

109 Police upfitter

110 –

111 –

113 –

114 Front windshieldwasher

115 Rear windowwasher

116 Left cooling fan

117 Fuel pump prime

118 –

Fuses Usage

119 –

120 –

121 Right HIDheadlamp

122 Left HID headlamp

123 Right cooling fan

Relays Usage

9 Fuel pump

29 Upfitter 2

37 Upfitter 3

48 Upfitter 4

51 Parking lamp

64 Secondaryfuel pump

72 Upfitter 1

84 Run/Crank

92 Engine controlmodule

112 Starter

120 Fuel pump prime

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuseblock access door is on thepassenger side edge of theinstrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


Vehicle Care 321

There are relays on the back of thefuse block. To access, press thetabs and remove the fuse block.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 –

2 –

3 –

4 Accessory poweroutlet 4

5 –

6 –

7 –

8 Glove box

9 –

10 –

11 –

12 Steering wheelcontrols

13 Body control module 8

14 –

15 –

16 –

17 –

18 –


322 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage


20 Rear seatentertainment

21 Sunroof/beaconupffiter

22 –

23 –

24 –

25 –

26 Infotainment/Airbag

27 –/RF window switch/Rain sensor

28 Obstacledetection/USB

29 Radio

Fuses Usage

30 –

31 –

32 –

33 –

34 –

35 –

36 Special equipmentoption B2

37 Special equipmentoption


39 DC to AC inverter

40 –

41 –

42 –

43 –

Fuses Usage

44 Right door windowmotor

45 Front blower



48 Amplifier

49 Right front seat


56 –

Relays Usage

51 –

52 Retained accessorypower

53 –

54 –

55 –


Vehicle Care 323

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver sideedge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


324 Vehicle Care


Fuses Usage

1 –

2 –

3 –


5 Accessory poweroutlet from retainedaccessory power

6 Accessory poweroutlet from batterypower

7 Universal garage dooropener/SEO Roofbeacon switch

8 SEO/Retainedaccessory power

9 –



Fuses Usage

12 Steering wheel controlbacklighting

13 –

14 –

15 –

16 Discrete logic ignitionsensor

17 Video processingmodule/Virtual keymodule

18 Mirror window module


20 Front bolster

21 –

22 –

23 –

24 HVAC ignition/AUXHVAC ignition

25 Instrument cluster/Ignition sensingdiagnostic moduleignition

Fuses Usage

26 Tilt column/Tilt columnlock 1/SEO 1/SEO 2

27 Data link connector/Driver seat module

28 Passive entry,Passive start/HVACbattery/ CGM

29 Content theftdeterrent

30 –

31 –

32 –

33 SEO Automatic levelcontrol/Leftheated seat

34 Park enable/Electricadjustable pedal

35 –

36 Miscellaneous/Runcrank

37 Heated steering wheel

38 Steering columnlock 2


Vehicle Care 325

Fuses Usage

39 Instrument clusterbattery

40 –

41 –

42 Euro trailer

43 Left doors

44 Driver power seat

45 –

46 Right heated, cooled,or ventilated seat

47 Left heated, cooled,or ventilated seat

48 –

49 –


56 –

Relays Usage

51 –

52 Retained accessorypower

Relays Usage

53 Run crank

54 –

55 –

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind the access panel on the leftside of the compartment.

Pull the panel out by grabbing thefinger access slot at the rear edge.



326 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

2 –

3 Right heated secondrow seat

4 Heated mirrors

5 Liftgate

6 Glass breakage

7 Liftglass

8 Liftgate module logic

9 Rear wiper

10 Rear heating,ventilation, and airconditioning blower

11 Second row seatfolding

12 Liftgate module

13 Third row seat folding

14 Rear accessory poweroutlet

15 Rear windowdefogger

19 Rear fog lamp

Relays Usage

1 Rear windowdefogger

16 Liftgate

17 Liftglass

18 Rear fog lamp

20 Heated mirror

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 196.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 327

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation 0 334 forinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 328.


328 Vehicle Care

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 342.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has P275/55R20 orP285/45R22 size tires, they areclassified as touring tires andare designed for on road use.The low-profile, wide treaddesign is not recommended foroff-road driving. See Off-RoadDriving 0 188, for additionalinformation.

Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage can

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

occur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have all-terraintires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving 0 188.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more unevenly than othertires. Consider rotating the tiresmore frequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection0 340.


Vehicle Care 329

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexample shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the third

week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading 0 344.


330 Vehicle Care

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 333 andVehicle Load Limits 0 196.

(8) Temporary Use Only : Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired andreplaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with theproper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 359.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The example shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, it

would mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.


Vehicle Care 331

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 333.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 196.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 196.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 196.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.


332 Vehicle Care

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 196.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommended

tire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure 0 333 andVehicle Load Limits 0 196.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.


Vehicle Care 333

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 341.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 344.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 196.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 196.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Warning

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.


334 Vehicle Care

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 196. How thevehicle is loaded affects vehiclehandling and ride comfort. Neverload the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the pressure of the tiresonce a month or more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 359 foradditional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If the

inflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher, putsadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 335

Warning (Continued)

This could cause a crash, andyou or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicleto be driven at high speeds, makesure the tires are rated forhigh-speed operation, are inexcellent condition, and are set tothe correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

When driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, setthe cold inflation pressure to 20 kPa(3 psi) above the recommended tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. Returnthe tires to the recommended coldtire inflation pressure whenhigh-speed driving has ended. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 196 andTire Pressure 0 333.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then


336 Vehicle Care

remain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 336.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressure

shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 196.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 144.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires when


Vehicle Care 337

they are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 196, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 333.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 340, Tire Rotation 0 340 andTires 0 326.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 342.


338 Vehicle Care. Operating electronic devices or

being near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. Seeyour dealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure.

When the low tire pressure warninglight comes on:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe, levelplace.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

4. Add air to the tire that isunderinflated. The turn signallamp will flash.

When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once and the turnsignal lamp will stop flashingand briefly turn solid.

Repeat these steps for allunderinflated tires that haveilluminated the low tire pressurewarning light.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Do notexceed the maximum pressurelisted on the tire sidewall. SeeTire Sidewall Labeling 0 329 andVehicle Load Limits 0 196.

If the tire is overinflated by morethan 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn willsound multiple times and the turnsignal lamp will continue to flash forseveral seconds after filling stops.To release and correct the pressure,while the turn signal lamp is stillflashing, briefly press the center of

the valve stem. When therecommended pressure is reached,the horn sounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flashwithin 15 seconds after starting toinflate the tire, the tire fill alert hasnot been activated or is not working.

If the hazard warning flashers areon, the tire fill alert visual feedbackwill not work properly.

The TPMS will not activate the tirefill alert properly under the followingconditions:

. There is interference from anexternal device or transmitter.

. The air pressure from theinflation device is not sufficientto inflate the tire.

. There is a malfunction inthe TPMS.

. There is a malfunction in thehorn or turn signal lamps.

. The identification code of theTPMS sensor is not registered tothe system.


Vehicle Care 339. The battery of the TPMS sensor

is low.

If the tire fill alert does not operatedue to TPMS interference, move thevehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back orforward and try again. If the tire fillalert feature is not working, use atire pressure gauge.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.

See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition on withoutstarting the vehicle or place thevehicle in Service Mode. SeeIgnition Positions (KeylessAccess) 0 202 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 204.

3. Make sure the Tire Pressureinfo page option is turned on.The info pages on the DIC can

be turned on and off throughthe Settings menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 144.

4. Use the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheelto scroll to the Tire Pressurescreen under the DICinfo page.

5. Press and hold V in the centerof the DIC controls.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.


340 Vehicle Care

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires 0 341 andWheel Replacement 0 346.


Vehicle Care 341

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure 0 333 andVehicle Load Limits 0 196.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 336.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 393, and“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” underTire Changing 0 349.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the inner diameter ofthe wheel hub opening withwheel bearing grease after awheel change or tire rotation toprevent corrosion or rust

buildup. Do not get grease onthe wheel mounting surface oron the wheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Some


342 Vehicle Care

commercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See TireInspection 0 340 andTire Rotation 0 340 for additionalinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Toidentify the age of a tire, use the tiremanufacture date which is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01-52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,

GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 329 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handling


Vehicle Care 343

performance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 340 for informationon proper tire rotation. However,if it is necessary to replace onlyone axle set of worn tires, placethe new tires on the rear axle.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,tread patterns, or types on thesame axle may cause loss ofcontrol of the vehicle, resultingin a crash or other vehicledamage. Use the same size,load range, and type of tiresas the original tires.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.


344 Vehicle Care

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 335.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 196 for the label location andmore information about the Tireand Loading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,

or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 342 andAccessories and Modifications0 283.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.


Vehicle Care 345

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the

norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,


346 Vehicle Care

underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.


Vehicle Care 347

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

If the vehicle has 265/65R18,P265/65R18, P275/55R20,or P285/45R22 size tires, do notuse tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it is contactingthe vehicle. Do not spin thewheels.

If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

Caution

If the vehicle has P255/70R17 orP265/70R17 size tires, use tirechains only where legal and only

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

when necessary. Use chains thatare the proper size for the tires.Install them on the rear tires only.Do not use chains on the fronttires. Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If the chains contactthe vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheelswith chains on will damage thevehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:


348 Vehicle Care

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tire

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

that has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 168.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever inP (Park).

3. For vehicles with four-wheeldrive with an N (Neutral)transfer case position, besure the transfer case is in adrive gear — not inN (Neutral).

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 349

Warning (Continued)

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Tire ChangingBefore changing a flat tire, see“Hands-Free Operation” underLiftgate 0 27.

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment needed to change aflat tire is stored in the rear of thevehicle, on the driver side, behind adoor in the trim panel.

1. Jack Knob2. Wing Nut Retaining the

Wheel Blocks3. Wing Nut Retaining the

Tool Bag


350 Vehicle Care

1. Pull to open the trimpanel door.

The third row driver side seatmay need to be folded toaccess the trim panel door.

2. Lift the acoustic pad to accessthe jack and tools.

3. Turn the wing nut retaining thetool bag (3) counterclockwise toremove it.

Pull the tool bag toward thefront of the vehicle and lift therear portion of the bag upwardto remove it.

4. Turn the jack knob (1)counterclockwise to release thejack and wheel blocks from thebracket.

5. Turn the wing nut retaining thewheel blocks (2)counterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer.

Use the following tools:

1. Jack2. Wheel Blocks3. Jack Handle4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench

To access the spare tire, refer to thefollowing graphics and instructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable


Vehicle Care 351

1. Open the hoist shaft accessdoor (3) on the bumper toaccess the spare tire lock (6).

If equipped with a hitch cover,turn the hitch cover retainerscounterclockwise and pull thecover downward to remove itbefore removing the hoist shaftaccess door.

2. To remove the spare tire lock(6), insert the ignition key, turnit clockwise and then pull itstraight out.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5), as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the holein the rear bumper (8) (hoistshaft access hole).

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (7) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

6. Pull the spare tire out fromunder the vehicle.


352 Vehicle Care

7. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.

Tilt the retainer and pull it andthe cable and spring throughthe center of the wheel.

8. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 347 for more information.

2. If the vehicle has a center capthat covers the wheelfasteners, place the chisel endof the wheel wrench in the sloton the wheel and gently pry thecap out.

If the wheel has a bolt-on hubcap, loosen the plastic nut capsby turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. The plasticnut caps will be retained in thehub cap after it is removedfrom the wheel.

3. Use the wheel wrench toloosen all the wheel nuts. Turnthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not remove thewheel nuts yet.

{ Warning

To avoid personal injury andvehicle damage, disable thepower assist steps before using ajack or placing an object underthe vehicle. See Power AssistSteps 0 32.


Vehicle Care 353

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

Left Front Shown, Right FrontSimilar

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a front tire of the vehicle,use the jack handle and onlyone jack handle extension.Attach the wheel wrench to thejack handle extension. Attachthe jack handle to the jack.Position the jack on the framebehind the flat tire where theframe sections overlap. Turnthe wheel wrench clockwise toraise the vehicle. Raise thevehicle far enough off the

ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clearthe ground.

Rear Position

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a rear tire of the vehicle,use the jack handle (2) andboth jack handleextensions (3). Attach thewheel wrench (4) to the jackhandle extensions (3). Attachthe jack handle (2) to thejack (1). Use the jackingpad (5) provided on the rearaxle. Turn the wheel wrench (4)clockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough


354 Vehicle Care

off the ground so there isenough room for the spare tireto clear the ground.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tire.

7. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel aftermounting the spare tire.


Vehicle Care 355

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Tighten each wheel nut byhand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

11. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 393 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 393 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall either thecenter cap or the bolt-on hub cap,depending on which one thevehicle has.


356 Vehicle Care. For center caps, line up the tab

on the center cap with the slot inthe wheel. The cap only goes inone way. Place the cap on thewheel and press until it snapsinto place.

. For bolt-on hub caps, line up theplastic nut caps with the wheelnuts and tighten clockwise byhand to get them started. Thentighten with the wheel wrenchuntil snug.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

{ Warning

Failure to follow these tire storageinstructions carefully could resultin personal injury or propertydamage if the hoist cable fails orif the tire comes loose. Make surethe tire is stored securely beforedriving.

Caution

Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for anextended period of time or withthe valve stem pointing up candamage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stempointing down and have thewheel/tire repaired as soon aspossible.

Caution

The tire hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare orroad tire and wheel assemblymust be installed on the tire hoistto use it.

{ Warning

An improperly stored spare tirecould come loose and cause acrash. To avoid personal injury orproperty damage, always storethe spare tire when the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.Refer to the following graphics andinstructions:


Vehicle Care 357

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable

1. Put the tire (9) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, andto the rear.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.Separate the tire/wheel retainerfrom the guide pin. Pull the pinthrough the center of thewheel. Tilt the retainer downthrough the center wheelopening.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5).

Caution

Use of an air wrench or otherpower tools with the hoistmechanism is not recommendedand could damage the system.Use only the tools supplied withthe hoist mechanism.


358 Vehicle Care

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the holein the rear bumper (8) (hoistshaft access hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer isseated in the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Thecable cannot be overtightened.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and thentry to turn the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrenchto tighten the cable.

Repeat this tightness checkprocedure when checking thespare tire pressure accordingto the scheduled maintenanceinformation or any time thespare tire is handled due toservice of other components.

Correctly Stored

Incorrectly Stored

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.

If equipped, reinstall the hitchcover and turn the retainersclockwise.

To store the tools:

1. Return the tools (wheelwrench, jack handle, and jackhandle extensions) to thetool bag.

2. Assemble the wheel blocksand jack together with thewing nut.


Vehicle Care 359

3. Position the jack and wheelblocks in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sureto position the holes in thebase of the jack onto the pin inthe mounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket tofasten the tool bag on the studand turn the wing nut clockwiseto secure.

6. Close the trim panel door.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure 0 333andVehicle Load Limits 0 196. Forinstructions on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see TireChanging 0 349.

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 329. This spare tireshould not be driven on over112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, atthe proper inflation pressure. Repairand replace the road tire as soon asit is convenient, and stow the sparetire for future use.

Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tire isinstalled, do not drive infour-wheel drive until the flat tireis repaired and/or replaced. Thevehicle could be damaged andthe repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Never usefour-wheel drive when a differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle.

The vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle.

This spare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and a different sizespare tire is installed, drive only intwo-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare tire iscorrectly inflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If the vehicle has aspare tire that does not match theoriginal road tires and wheels in sizeand type, do not include the spare inthe tire rotation.


360 Vehicle Care

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 305.

If the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTER

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

HANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 282 and the backcover.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other.If they are, it could cause an


Vehicle Care 361

unwanted ground connection.You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrake. For vehicles withfour-wheel-drive with aN (Neutral) transfer caseposition, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — notN (Neutral).

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

warranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn the ignition off on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turnoff the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

The positive (+) terminal isunder a red plastic cover at thepositive battery post. Touncover the positive (+)terminal, open the red plasticcover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals, seeEngine Compartment Overview0 286.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it in

(Continued)


362 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted

metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+)terminal of the vehicle with thedead battery.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−)terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the metalbracket that is bolted to the


Vehicle Care 363

engine and supports theresonator, on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

10. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lashor hook to suspensioncomponents. Use the properstraps around the tires to securethe vehicle. Do not drag a lockedwheel/tire. Use tire skates ordollies under any locked wheel/tire while loading the vehicle. Donot use a sling type lift to tow thevehicle. This could damage thevehicle.

Caution

If the vehicle cannot be shiftedinto Neutral (N), do not use thetow eye to tow the vehicle.Vehicle damage may occur.


364 Vehicle Care

GM recommends a flatbed tow truckto transport a disabled vehicle. Useramps to help reduce approachangles, if necessary. A towedvehicle should have its drive wheelsoff the ground. Contact RoadsideAssistance or a professional towingservice if the disabled vehicle mustbe towed.

Front Attachment Points

The vehicle is equipped withspecific attachment points to beused to pull the vehicle onto aflatbed car carrier from a flat road

surface. Do not use theseattachment points to pull the vehiclefrom snow, mud or sand.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing aredinghy and dolly towing. Dinghytowing is towing the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground. Dollytowing is towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels on a dolly.

Follow the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s instructions. Seeyour dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. Before towing the vehicle,become familiar with the locallaws that apply to recreationalvehicle towing. These laws mayvary by region.

. What is the towing capacity ofthe towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


Vehicle Care 365

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

If the two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drivevehicles with a two speed transfercase that have a N (Neutral) and a 4n setting.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or others couldbe injured. Set the parking brakebefore shifting the transfer caseto N (Neutral).

To dinghy tow:

1. Position the vehicle beingtowed behind the tow vehicle,facing forward and on a levelsurface.

2. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

3. Apply the parking brake andstart the engine.


366 Vehicle Care

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 219. Check that thevehicle is in N (Neutral) bystarting the engine and shiftingthe transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

5. Shift the transmission intoD (Drive). Turn the engine off.

Caution

Failure to disconnect the negativebattery cable or to have it contactthe terminals can cause damageto the vehicle.

6. Disconnect the negativebattery cable at the battery andsecure the nut and bolt. Coverthe negative battery post with anon-conductive material toprevent any contact with thenegative battery terminal.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

Caution

If the steering column is locked,vehicle damage may occur.

8. Move the steering wheel tomake sure the steering columnis unlocked.

9. With a foot on the brake pedal,release the parking brake.

10. Keep the ignition key in thetowed vehicle in ACC/ACCESSORY to prevent thesteering column from locking.If equipped with KeylessAccess, keep the RKEtransmitter outside of thevehicle, and manually lock thedoors. Access the vehicle as ifit has a dead RKE transmitterbattery, by using the key in thedoor lock.

Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle

Before disconnecting the towedvehicle:

1. Park on a level surface.

2. Set the parking brake, thenshift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Connect the battery.

4. Apply the brake pedal.

5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off. Shift thetransfer case out of N (Neutral)to 2 m. See “Shifting out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 219. See your dealer ifthe transfer case cannot beshifted out of N (Neutral).

6. Check that the vehicle is in 2 mby starting the engine andshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should bemovement of the vehicle whileshifting.


Vehicle Care 367

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park) and turn off theignition.

8. Disconnect the vehicle from thetow vehicle.


10. Reset any lost presets.

The outside temperaturedisplay will default to 0 °C (32 °F) but will reset with normalusage.

Dolly Towing Caution

Do not tow this vehicle with twowheels on the ground, or vehicledamage could occur. Thisdamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Dolly towing this vehicle is notallowed with either the front or therear tires on the ground fortwo-wheel drive or four-wheel drive,regardless of transfer case.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)


368 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Caution

Do not power wash anycomponent under the hood that

has thise symbol.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer to

have the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.


Vehicle Care 369

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chromeor stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhen dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.


370 Vehicle Care. Aftermarket appearance caps or

covers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply weatherstrip lubricant onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfaces

can be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 388.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Wheel Trim

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.


Vehicle Care 371

Caution

Chrome wheels and chromewheel trim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium chloride orcalcium chloride. These are usedon roads for conditions such asdust and ice. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage onwheels and wheel trim, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,or brushes. Use only GMapproved cleaners. Do not drivethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash that uses silicon carbidetire/wheel cleaning brushes.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Damage could occur and therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect all other brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

For 1500 Series vehicles, at leastevery other oil change lubricate theouter tie rod ends.

Control arm ball joints on 1500Series vehicles aremaintenance-free.

Caution

Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher,or damage could result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steelfuel door hinge and power assiststep hinges, unless the componentsare plastic. Applying silicone greaseon weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.


372 Vehicle Care

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect. If equippedwith power assist steps, extendthem and then use a high pressurewash to clean all joints and gaps.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applyall cleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.


Vehicle Care 373. Never rub any surface

aggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth


374 Vehicle Care

to a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently change

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 375

Caution (Continued)

the appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

If equipped, wash with warm waterand mild detergent. Do not usechlorine bleach. Rinse with coldwater, and then dry completely.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.


376 Vehicle Care. Do not use a floor mat if the

vehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the driver sidefloor mat to unlock each retainerand remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 377

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 377

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 379

Special Application ServicesSpecial Application

Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Additional Maintenanceand Care

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 391

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GMperformed on the vehicle. Theuse of flushes, solvents, cleaners,or lubricants that are notapproved by GM could damagethe vehicle, requiring expensiverepairs that are not covered bythe vehicle warranty.


378 Service and Maintenance

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 196.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel (L83 5.3LV8 Engine) 0 254 orRecommended Fuel (L86 6.2LV8 Engine) 0 254.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 283.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 289.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures, including the spare.See Tire Pressure 0 333.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 340.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 302.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil and

filter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 291.

Extended Idle Use

When the vehicle is used in a waythat requires extended idle time,one hour of use shall be deemedthe same as 53 km (33 mi). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 144 for hourmeter.

Air Conditioning Desiccant(Replace Every Seven Years)

The air conditioning system requiresmaintenance every seven years.This service requires replacement ofthe desiccant to help the longevityand efficient operation of the airconditioning system. This servicecan be complex. See your dealer.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 340.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil 0 289 andEngine Oil Life System 0 291.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 297.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 302.

. Check tire inflation pressures,including the spare. See TirePressure 0 333.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 340.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 296.


380 Service and Maintenance. Inspect brake system. See

Exterior Care 0 367.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damage,including cracks or tears in therubber boots, loose or missingparts, or signs of wear at leastonce a year. See Exterior Care0 367. Lubricate the suspensionand steering components atleast every other oil change (ifequipped with grease fittings).

. Inspect power steering forproper attachment, connections,binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

. Visually inspect halfshafts anddrive shafts for excessive wear,lubricant leaks, and/or damageincluding: tube dents or cracks,constant velocity joint oruniversal joint looseness,cracked or missing boots, looseor missing boot clamps, centerbearing excessive looseness,loose or missing fasteners, andaxle seal leaks.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 71.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 367.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 308.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 0 308.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 309.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold open

ability of the strut. If the holdopen is low, service the gasstrut. See Gas Strut(s) 0 310.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 44.

. Verify spare tire key lockoperation and lubricate asneeded. See Tire Changing0 349.

. Visually inspect the spare tire toensure that it is tightly stowedunder the vehicle. Push, pull,and try to turn the tire. If thespare tire moves, tighten asnecessary. See Tire Changing0 349.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12

00

0k

m/7

,50

0m

i

24

00

0k

m/1

5,0

00

mi

36

00

0k

m/2

2,5

00

mi

48

00

0k

m/3

0,0

00

mi

60

00

0k

m/3

7,5

00

mi

72

00

0k

m/4

5,0

00

mi

84

00

0k

m/5

2,5

00

mi

96

00

0k

m/6

0,0

00

mi

10

80

00

km

/67

,50

0m

i

12

00

00

km

/75

,00

0m

i

13

20

00

km

/82

,50

0m

i

14

40

00

km

/90

,00

0m

i

15

60

00

km

/97

,50

0m

i

16

80

00

km

/10

5,0

00

mi

18

00

00

km

/11

2,5

00

mi

19

20

00

km

/12

0,0

00

mi

20

40

00

km

/12

7,5

00

mi

21

60

00

km

/13

5,0

00

mi

22

80

00

km

/14

2,5

00

mi

24

00

00

km

/15

0,0

00

mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with4WD. (4) @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (8) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gasstruts. (9) @ @

Replace air conditioning desiccant. (10)



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed ifdriving in areas with heavy traffic,poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 296.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the transfer case fluid.Contaminated fluid will decrease thelife of the transfer case and/or axlesand should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 297.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 304.

(8) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 309.

(9) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 310.

(10) Replace air conditioningdesiccant every seven years.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12

00

0k

m/7

,50

0m

i

24

00

0k

m/1

5,0

00

mi

36

00

0k

m/2

2,5

00

mi

48

00

0k

m/3

0,0

00

mi

60

00

0k

m/3

7,5

00

mi

72

00

0k

m/4

5,0

00

mi

84

00

0k

m/5

2,5

00

mi

96

00

0k

m/6

0,0

00

mi

10

80

00

km

/67

,50

0m

i

12

00

00

km

/75

,00

0m

i

13

20

00

km

/82

,50

0m

i

14

40

00

km

/90

,00

0m

i

15

60

00

km

/97

,50

0m

i

16

80

00

km

/10

5,0

00

mi

18

00

00

km

/11

2,5

00

mi

19

20

00

km

/12

0,0

00

mi

20

40

00

km

/12

7,5

00

mi

21

60

00

km

/13

5,0

00

mi

22

80

00

km

/14

2,5

00

mi

24

00

00

km

/15

0,0

00

mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with4WD. (4) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (8) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gasstruts. (9) @ @

Replace air conditioning desiccant. (10)



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed ifdriving in areas with heavy traffic,poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 296.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water

can overcome the seals andcontaminate the transfer case fluid.Contaminated fluid will decrease thelife of the transfer case and/or axlesand should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 297.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 304.

(8) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 309.

(9) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 310.

(10) Replace air conditioningdesiccant every seven years.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 367.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.



Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the

rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 372 andExterior Care 0 367.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.


Service and Maintenance 387. Your dealer has the required

equipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission (ExceptDenali)

DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission(Denali Only)

DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19352619, inCanada 19352620).

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Cooling System 0 297.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscositygrade. ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil0 289.

Front Axle (Four-Wheel Drive) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Front Axle Propshaft Spline orOne-Piece Propshaft Spline

(Two-Wheel Drive)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, inCanada 19257122).

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, inCanada 19353127).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges,Power Assist Steps, and Outer

Liftgate Handle Pivot Points

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Rear Axle SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orequivalent.

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C

Engine Oil Filter 12690385 PF63E

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 23281440 CF188

Spark Plugs 12622441 41–114

Wiper Blades

Front Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 84613732 —

Front Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 84613732 —

Rear – 33 cm (13.0 in) 22956295 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


392 Technical Data

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle Identification

Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Service Parts Identification . . . 392

Vehicle DataCapacities and

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 395

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side of the vehicle. It canbe seen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacement

parts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 393 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentificationThere may be a large barcode onthe certification label on the centerpillar that you can scan for thefollowing information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Model designation

. Paint information

. Production options

If there is not a large barcode onthis label, then you will find thissame information on a label insideof the glove box.


Technical Data 393

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System*

5.3L V8 16.8 L 17.8 qt

6.2L V8 16.8 L 17.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

5.3L V8 7.6 L 8.0 qt

6.2L V8 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Short Wheelbase 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Long Wheelbase 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt


394 Technical Data

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

5.3L V8 C 0.95–1.10mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.2L V8 J 0.95–1.10mm (0.037–0.043 in)

Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damagethe spark plug.


Technical Data 395

Engine Drive Belt Routing

5.3L and 6.2L V8 Engines


396 Customer Information

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer Satisfaction

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Customer Assistance

Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 399Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 399GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Roadside Assistance

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Scheduling Service

Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Courtesy Transportation

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 403Publication Ordering

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Radio Frequency

Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to

the United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 408OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 409

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


Customer Information 397

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson Blvd.Suite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One



and Two, General Motors of CanadaCompany wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third partyarbiter, and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of CanadaCompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.gmc.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-888-889-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S.can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-888-889-2438. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceallows access to videos, articles,and vehicle health specific to yourGMC as well as your OnStarAccount information all in one place.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manualsand view vehicle-specific how-tovideos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and Vehicle DiagnosticInformation. Schedule serviceappointments.

I : View and print dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers,and hours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 392.

H : Compare and shop for GMCand OnStar plans and Services.View GM Card and SiriusXMinformation (if equipped).

F : Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

See my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.

GMC Owner Centre (Canada)mygmccanada.ca

Visit the GMC Owner Centre atmygmccanada.ca (English) ormy.gmccanada.ca (French) toaccess similar benefits to theU.S. site.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement, up to certain limits,of eligible aftermarket adaptiveequipment required for the vehicle,such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift for thevehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.comor call the GM Mobility Assistance



Center at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility program. See www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE(800-463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of yourlocation

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle's powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner or

driver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner's



responsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyevent, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 500 miles.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not a

regularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 L. Diesel fuel deliverymay be restricted. Propane andother fuels are not providedthrough this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 km from where your trip wasstarted to qualify.Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders are required.Once authorization has beenreceived, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help tomake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the Roadside

Assistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem is



safety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate booklet

entitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM. If U.S. customers arrangetheir own transportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claim

amounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel, rentalvehicle insurance, taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage,or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair are alsoyour responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.



Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacement

parts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 400.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 78.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled



original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Publication OrderingInformation

Service Manuals

Service manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengine, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electricalsystem, steering system, body, etc.

Customer Literature

Owner’s manuals are writtenspecifically for owners and areintended to provide basicoperational information about thevehicle. The owner’s manualincludes the Maintenance Schedulefor all models.

Customer literature publicationsavailable for purchase includeowner’s manuals, warrantymanuals, infotainment manuals, andportfolios. Portfolios include anowner’s manual, warranty manual,infotainment manual, if applicable,and zip lock bag or pouch.

Current and Past Models

Service manuals and customerliterature are available for manycurrent and past model year GMvehicles.

To order, call 1-800-551-4123Monday–Friday, 8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m.eastern time

For credit card orders only (VISA,MasterCard, or Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

To order by mail, write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and with



Innovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment (ISED) Canada'sRSP-100 / ICES-GEN.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call TransportCanada at 1-800-333-0510;go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations andRecalls Division80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

In the U.S., call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

In Mexico, call 01-800-466-0812 or01-800-466-0801.

In other Central America andCaribbean Countries, call52-722-236-0680.

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven or used. Forexample, the vehicle uses computermodules to monitor and controlengine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy them in a crash, and,if equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help the dealer technicianservice the vehicle or to help GMimprove safety or features. Somemodules may also store data abouthow the vehicle is operated, such asrate of fuel consumption or averagespeed. These modules may retainpersonal preferences, such as radiopresets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



CybersecurityGM collects information about theuse of your vehicle includingoperational and safety relatedinformation. We collect thisinformation to provide, evaluate,improve, and troubleshoot ourproducts and services and todevelop new products and services.The protection of vehicle electronicssystems and customer data fromunauthorized outside electronicaccess or control is important toGM. GM maintains appropriatesecurity standards, practices,guidelines and controls aimed atdefending the vehicle and thevehicle service ecosystem againstunauthorized electronic access,detecting possible malicious activityin related networks, and respondingto suspected cybersecurity incidentsin a timely, coordinated and effectivemanner. Security incidents couldimpact your safety or compromiseyour private data. To minimizesecurity risks, please do not connectyour vehicle electronic systems tounauthorized devices or connect

your vehicle to any unknown oruntrusted networks (such asBluetooth, WIFI or similartechnology). In the event yoususpect any security incidentimpacting your data or the safeoperation of your vehicle, pleasestop operating your vehicle andcontact your dealer.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.



To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped withOnStar and has an active serviceplan, additional data may becollected and transmitted throughthe OnStar system. This includesinformation about the vehicle’soperation; collisions involving thevehicle; the use of the vehicle andits features, including infotainment;and the location and approximateGPS speed of the vehicle. Refer tothe OnStar Terms and Conditionsand Privacy Statement on theOnStar website.

See OnStar Additional Information0 412.

Infotainment SystemUsing the navigation system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See theinfotainment manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.


410 OnStar

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar Additional

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paid serviceplan and data plan. OnStar requiresthe vehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar User

Terms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more detailsincluding system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.


OnStar 411

Press= to:

. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. See theinfotainment manual forinformation on how to use theOnStar app.

Or

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require anactive safety and security plan. WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho is immediately connected in tothe vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.


412 OnStar

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover thevehicle.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase. PressQ to set up an account.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar or connectedservices if the vehicle is disposedof, sold, transferred, or if thelease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStaror connected service options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteServices, and Roadside Assistanceare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar User Terms,Privacy Statement, and SoftwareTerms:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.


OnStar 413

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar or connected servicescannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where OnStar has anagreement with a wireless serviceprovider for service in that area. Thewireless service provider must alsohave coverage, network capacity,reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar orconnected services. Serviceinvolving location information aboutthe vehicle cannot work unless GPSsignals are available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar or connectedservices may not work if the OnStarequipment is not properly installedor it has not been properlymaintained. If equipment or softwareis added, connected, or modified,OnStar or connected services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damage

to the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpwith physical disabilities andmedical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicle

access to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

If equipped, TTY mode can beturned on or off by touchingSettings, then Apps, and thenPhone. When TTY mode is on,phone calls can be made orreceived with OnStar using theinfotainment display.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.


414 OnStar

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for 10 dayswithout an ignition cycle. If thevehicle has not been started for10 days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate to

call OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this message

may come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 280. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,


OnStar 415

security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such assaved navigation destinations orpre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacystatement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://opensource.lge.com/index

www.onstar.com/us/en/

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OR


416 OnStar

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed

Gordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not


OnStar 417

be misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use ofthe Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


418 Connected Services

ConnectedServices

Connected ServicesNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Connected Services

NavigationNavigation requires a specificOnStar or connected service plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton, if equipped, may vary byvehicle and region. For somevehicles, press= to open the

OnStar app on the infotainmentdisplay. For other vehicles press=as follows.

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat



Connected Services 419

2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent tothe navigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following services help withstaying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

. Change the default passwordsfor the Wi-Fi hotspot andmyGMC mobile application.Make these passwords differentfrom each other and use acombination of letters, numbers,and symbols to increase thesecurity.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier).This is your network’s name thatis visible to other wirelessdevices. Choose a unique nameand avoid family names orvehicle descriptions.

Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to openthe OnStar app on theinfotainment display, thenselect Wi-Fi Hotspot. On somevehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-FiSettings on the screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor. On some


420 Connected Services

vehicles, the SSID andpassword can be changed inthe Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobiledevices. Manage data usage byturning Wi-Fi on or off on yourmobile device, using the myGMCmobile app, or by contacting anOnStar Advisor. On some vehicles,Wi-Fi can also be managed from theWi-Fi Hotspot menu.

MyGMC Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myGMC mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. GMC users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request roadside assistance.

. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with GMC on socialmedia.

Features are subject to change. FormyGMC mobile app information andcompatibility, see my.gmc.com.

An active OnStar or connectedservice plan may be required.A compatible device,factory-installed remote start, and

power locks are required. Data ratesapply. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

Marketplace

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers onyour route, help locate hotels,or book a room. These servicesvary by market.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle's key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics, if equipped,provides a way to keep up onmaintenance. Capabilities vary bymodel. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.Features are subject to change. Forupdates on feature capabilities, seemy.gmc.com. Message and datarates may apply.

GMC Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Cana-da/Mexico-13566587) - 2020 - CRC - 4/15/19

Index 421

Index AAccessories and

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . 211Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . 232Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 280Additional Information

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Additional Maintenance

and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Adjustable Throttle and

Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Adjustments

Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .49Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 296Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .175, 179Air Filter, Passenger

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Airbag System

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85How Does an Airbag

Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78Passenger Sensing System . . . .80What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after an

Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78When Should an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .75

AirbagsAdding Equipment to the

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Passenger Status Indicator . . . 135Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Servicing Airbag-Equipped

Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 249

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 224

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Appearance Care

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110


422 Index

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Assistance Systems forParking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . 242

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . 248Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Transmission Fluid . . . . . . 292, 295

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Shift Lock Control Function

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

BBattery

Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Battery (cont'd)Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Battery - North America . . . .305, 360Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 309Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Brake

Pedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

System Warning Light . . . . . . . . 138Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Automatic

Emergency (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . 248Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 201Bulb Replacement

Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312High Intensity Discharge

(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 314

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119California

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .282, 305, 360,

Back CoverCanadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities and

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Carbon Monoxide

Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 3Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 110Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Charging

Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 135Check

Engine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136


Index 423

Check (cont'd)Ignition Transmission Lock . . . 308

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .88Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 105, 106Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Cleaning

Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 403Compartments

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Connected Services

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

ConnectionsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . 419

ControlHill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Traction and Electronic

Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Coolant

Engine Temperature Gauge . . 131Engine Temperature

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 179Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Courtesy Transportation

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . 232Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Text Telephone (TTY)

Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Customer Information

Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 403Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 3Data Collection

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 409OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 408Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Diagnostics

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . 420Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Door

Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 395Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . 240Driver Information

Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144


424 Index

DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 245Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . 184Characteristics and

Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 193If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 195Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 187Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 196Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Electrical Equipment,

Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Electrical System

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 315Instrument Panel Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 323

Electrical System (cont'd)Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Rear Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Emergency

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Check Light (Malfunction

Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 286Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Coolant Temperature

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 130Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 212Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 408Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 164Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 166Exterior Lighting Battery

Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

FFan

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Filter,

Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 296Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 168Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349FlexFuel

E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 111Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Fluid

AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 295

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304


Index 425

Fluid (cont'd)Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Forward Collision Alert

(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . .219, 305Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . 139Frequency Statement

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Front Fog Lamp

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Front Seats

Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . .54Fuel

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Economy, Driving for Better . . . 184Filling a Portable Fuel

Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 142Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . .211

Fuel (cont'd)Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Top Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Fuses

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 315Instrument Panel Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 323Rear Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Gauges

Engine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 130Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Transmission Temperature . . . . 132Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Gauges (cont'd)Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Warning Lights and

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125General Information

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 377Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 168Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Headlamps

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167High Intensity Discharge

(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 143High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 166


426 Index

Headlamps (cont'd)Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 143

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 179High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 143High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . 334Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 193Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . 228Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 225Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116How to Wear Seat Belts

Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 179

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . .202, 204Ignition Transmission Lock

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

InformationPublication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . 405

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . 5Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 41Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - North

America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

KKeyless Entry

Remote (RKE) System . . . . . 13, 16Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9, 10

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 329Lamps

Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 167Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Lamps (cont'd)Exterior Lamps Off

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Exterior Lighting Battery

Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Malfunction Indicator

(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . 250Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . 251Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . 139Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65LATCH System

Replacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Level Control

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Lighting

Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 170


Index 427

Lighting (cont'd)LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 138Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Check Engine (Malfunction

Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning . . . . . . . 141Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 142Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 166Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . 133Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Lights (cont'd)Traction Control System

(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

LockSteering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Locks

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 142Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

MMagnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . 229Maintenance

Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 379Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 136Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Messages

Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

MirrorChild-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Automatic Dimming

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 41


428 Index

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

NNavigation

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . 418Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 201Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . 306

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 291Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . 130Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 86Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 399OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409OnStar Additional

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

OperationFog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Overview

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

PPark

Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Parking

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Brake and P (Park)

Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 309Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . .211

Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 242

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 80Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California . . . . . . 283

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 209Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . 70Privacy

Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 407Program

Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . 402Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Proposition

65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 305, 360,

Back CoverPublication Ordering

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 405Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306


Index 429

Rear Axle (cont'd)Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Rear Climate Control System . . . 179Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 242Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 118Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Recommended

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Records

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 364Reimbursement Program,

GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 16Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Replacement

Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Replacement Parts

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 86Replacing LATCH System

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Replacing Seat Belt System

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government . . . . . . . . 407General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Ride Control Systems

Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Roads

Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Roadside Assistance

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Roof

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 395Running the Vehicle While

Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

SSafety Defects Reporting

Canadian Government . . . . . . . . 407General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 401Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71How to Wear Seat Belts

Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .72Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .70

SeatsCenter Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Heated and Ventilated Front . . . .54Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .49Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .48Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .50


430 Index

Seats (cont'd)Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Securing Child

Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .103, 105, 106Security

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Accessories and

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 283Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 391Maintenance, General

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 401

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Shift Lock Control Function

Check, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Shifting (cont'd)Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 249Signals, Turn and

Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Special Application Services . . . . 384Specifications and

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129StabiliTrak

OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 23Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 308Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . 35Steps

Power Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Storage

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Storage Areas

Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Storage Areas (cont'd)Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 109Struts

Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3System

Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 409Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 399Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 36

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60


Index 431

Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333, 334Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Pressure Monitor Operation . . 336Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 335Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Terminology and Definitions . . 331Uniform Tire Quality

Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 346When It Is Time for New

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Tires (cont'd)Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 139Towing

Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 259Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270General Information . . . . . . . . . . 259Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 364Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 278Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

TractionControl System

(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . 141Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 278Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Transmission

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . 292, 295Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 132

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Turn and Lane-Change

Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 344Universal Remote System . . . . . . 160

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicle

Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Identification Number (VIN) . . . 392Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 140


432 Index

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Vehicle SecuritySteering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . .35

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

WWarning

Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 138Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance . . 346Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 92Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 309Wipers

Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

84367243 B

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

20_GMC_Yukon_YukonXL_YukonDenali_COV_en_US_84367243B_2019AUG05.ai 1 8/2/2019 11:48:38 AM20_GMC_Yukon_YukonXL_YukonDenali_COV_en_US_84367243B_2019AUG05.ai 1 8/2/2019 11:48:38 AM

Date post:	18-Apr-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	4 times
Download:	0 times

2020 GMC Yukon Owners Manual · 2020-04-09 · GMC Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner Manual...

Documents